config.host (powerpc-ibm-aix*): Add crtdbase.o to extra_parts.
[gcc.git] / gcc / doc / tm.texi.in
1 @c Copyright (C) 1988-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
2 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
3 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
4
5 @node Target Macros
6 @chapter Target Description Macros and Functions
7 @cindex machine description macros
8 @cindex target description macros
9 @cindex macros, target description
10 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
11
12 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
13 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
14 @file{@var{machine}.h} and a C source file named @file{@var{machine}.c}.
15 The header file defines numerous macros that convey the information
16 about the target machine that does not fit into the scheme of the
17 @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be a link to
18 @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h} includes
19 @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include @file{config.h}. The
20 source file defines a variable @code{targetm}, which is a structure
21 containing pointers to functions and data relating to the target
22 machine. @file{@var{machine}.c} should also contain their definitions,
23 if they are not defined elsewhere in GCC, and other functions called
24 through the macros defined in the @file{.h} file.
25
26 @menu
27 * Target Structure:: The @code{targetm} variable.
28 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
29 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @option{-m68000} and @option{-m68020}.
30 * Per-Function Data:: Defining data structures for per-function information.
31 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
32 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
33 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
34 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
35 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
36 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
37 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
38 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
39 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
40 * Anchored Addresses:: Defining how @option{-fsection-anchors} should work.
41 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
42 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
43 * Scheduling:: Adjusting the behavior of the instruction scheduler.
44 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
45 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
46 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
47 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
48 * Floating Point:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
49 * Mode Switching:: Insertion of mode-switching instructions.
50 * Target Attributes:: Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}.
51 * Emulated TLS:: Emulated TLS support.
52 * MIPS Coprocessors:: MIPS coprocessor support and how to customize it.
53 * PCH Target:: Validity checking for precompiled headers.
54 * C++ ABI:: Controlling C++ ABI changes.
55 * Named Address Spaces:: Adding support for named address spaces
56 * Misc:: Everything else.
57 @end menu
58
59 @node Target Structure
60 @section The Global @code{targetm} Variable
61 @cindex target hooks
62 @cindex target functions
63
64 @deftypevar {struct gcc_target} targetm
65 The target @file{.c} file must define the global @code{targetm} variable
66 which contains pointers to functions and data relating to the target
67 machine. The variable is declared in @file{target.h};
68 @file{target-def.h} defines the macro @code{TARGET_INITIALIZER} which is
69 used to initialize the variable, and macros for the default initializers
70 for elements of the structure. The @file{.c} file should override those
71 macros for which the default definition is inappropriate. For example:
72 @smallexample
73 #include "target.h"
74 #include "target-def.h"
75
76 /* @r{Initialize the GCC target structure.} */
77
78 #undef TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
79 #define TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES @var{machine}_comp_type_attributes
80
81 struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER;
82 @end smallexample
83 @end deftypevar
84
85 Where a macro should be defined in the @file{.c} file in this manner to
86 form part of the @code{targetm} structure, it is documented below as a
87 ``Target Hook'' with a prototype. Many macros will change in future
88 from being defined in the @file{.h} file to being part of the
89 @code{targetm} structure.
90
91 Similarly, there is a @code{targetcm} variable for hooks that are
92 specific to front ends for C-family languages, documented as ``C
93 Target Hook''. This is declared in @file{c-family/c-target.h}, the
94 initializer @code{TARGETCM_INITIALIZER} in
95 @file{c-family/c-target-def.h}. If targets initialize @code{targetcm}
96 themselves, they should set @code{target_has_targetcm=yes} in
97 @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a default definition is used.
98
99 Similarly, there is a @code{targetm_common} variable for hooks that
100 are shared between the compiler driver and the compilers proper,
101 documented as ``Common Target Hook''. This is declared in
102 @file{common/common-target.h}, the initializer
103 @code{TARGETM_COMMON_INITIALIZER} in
104 @file{common/common-target-def.h}. If targets initialize
105 @code{targetm_common} themselves, they should set
106 @code{target_has_targetm_common=yes} in @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a
107 default definition is used.
108
109 @node Driver
110 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
111 @cindex driver
112 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
113
114 @c prevent bad page break with this line
115 You can control the compilation driver.
116
117 @defmac DRIVER_SELF_SPECS
118 A list of specs for the driver itself. It should be a suitable
119 initializer for an array of strings, with no surrounding braces.
120
121 The driver applies these specs to its own command line between loading
122 default @file{specs} files (but not command-line specified ones) and
123 choosing the multilib directory or running any subcommands. It
124 applies them in the order given, so each spec can depend on the
125 options added by earlier ones. It is also possible to remove options
126 using @samp{%<@var{option}} in the usual way.
127
128 This macro can be useful when a port has several interdependent target
129 options. It provides a way of standardizing the command line so
130 that the other specs are easier to write.
131
132 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
133 @end defmac
134
135 @defmac OPTION_DEFAULT_SPECS
136 A list of specs used to support configure-time default options (i.e.@:
137 @option{--with} options) in the driver. It should be a suitable initializer
138 for an array of structures, each containing two strings, without the
139 outermost pair of surrounding braces.
140
141 The first item in the pair is the name of the default. This must match
142 the code in @file{config.gcc} for the target. The second item is a spec
143 to apply if a default with this name was specified. The string
144 @samp{%(VALUE)} in the spec will be replaced by the value of the default
145 everywhere it occurs.
146
147 The driver will apply these specs to its own command line between loading
148 default @file{specs} files and processing @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}, using
149 the same mechanism as @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}.
150
151 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
152 @end defmac
153
154 @defmac CPP_SPEC
155 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
156 pass to CPP@. It can also specify how to translate options you
157 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP@.
158
159 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
160 @end defmac
161
162 @defmac CPLUSPLUS_CPP_SPEC
163 This macro is just like @code{CPP_SPEC}, but is used for C++, rather
164 than C@. If you do not define this macro, then the value of
165 @code{CPP_SPEC} (if any) will be used instead.
166 @end defmac
167
168 @defmac CC1_SPEC
169 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
170 pass to @code{cc1}, @code{cc1plus}, @code{f771}, and the other language
171 front ends.
172 It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
173 for GCC to pass to front ends.
174
175 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
176 @end defmac
177
178 @defmac CC1PLUS_SPEC
179 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
180 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
181 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
182
183 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
184 Note that everything defined in CC1_SPEC is already passed to
185 @code{cc1plus} so there is no need to duplicate the contents of
186 CC1_SPEC in CC1PLUS_SPEC@.
187 @end defmac
188
189 @defmac ASM_SPEC
190 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
191 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
192 you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
193 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
194
195 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
196 @end defmac
197
198 @defmac ASM_FINAL_SPEC
199 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
200 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
201 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
202 an example of this.
203
204 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
205 @end defmac
206
207 @defmac AS_NEEDS_DASH_FOR_PIPED_INPUT
208 Define this macro, with no value, if the driver should give the assembler
209 an argument consisting of a single dash, @option{-}, to instruct it to
210 read from its standard input (which will be a pipe connected to the
211 output of the compiler proper). This argument is given after any
212 @option{-o} option specifying the name of the output file.
213
214 If you do not define this macro, the assembler is assumed to read its
215 standard input if given no non-option arguments. If your assembler
216 cannot read standard input at all, use a @samp{%@{pipe:%e@}} construct;
217 see @file{mips.h} for instance.
218 @end defmac
219
220 @defmac LINK_SPEC
221 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
222 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
223 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
224
225 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
226 @end defmac
227
228 @defmac LIB_SPEC
229 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
230 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
231 command given to the linker.
232
233 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
234 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
235 @end defmac
236
237 @defmac LIBGCC_SPEC
238 Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
239 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
240 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
241 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
242
243 If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
244 passes the string @option{-lgcc} to the linker.
245 @end defmac
246
247 @defmac REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC
248 By default, if @code{ENABLE_SHARED_LIBGCC} is defined, the
249 @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} is not directly used by the driver program but is
250 instead modified to refer to different versions of @file{libgcc.a}
251 depending on the values of the command line flags @option{-static},
252 @option{-shared}, @option{-static-libgcc}, and @option{-shared-libgcc}. On
253 targets where these modifications are inappropriate, define
254 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} instead. @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} tells the
255 driver how to place a reference to @file{libgcc} on the link command
256 line, but, unlike @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}, it is used unmodified.
257 @end defmac
258
259 @defmac USE_LD_AS_NEEDED
260 A macro that controls the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}
261 mentioned in @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}. If nonzero, a spec will be
262 generated that uses @option{--as-needed} or equivalent options and the
263 shared @file{libgcc} in place of the
264 static exception handler library, when linking without any of
265 @code{-static}, @code{-static-libgcc}, or @code{-shared-libgcc}.
266 @end defmac
267
268 @defmac LINK_EH_SPEC
269 If defined, this C string constant is added to @code{LINK_SPEC}.
270 When @code{USE_LD_AS_NEEDED} is zero or undefined, it also affects
271 the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} mentioned in
272 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}.
273 @end defmac
274
275 @defmac STARTFILE_SPEC
276 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
277 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
278 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
279
280 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
281 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
282 @end defmac
283
284 @defmac ENDFILE_SPEC
285 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
286 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
287 the very end of the command given to the linker.
288
289 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
290 @end defmac
291
292 @defmac THREAD_MODEL_SPEC
293 GCC @code{-v} will print the thread model GCC was configured to use.
294 However, this doesn't work on platforms that are multilibbed on thread
295 models, such as AIX 4.3. On such platforms, define
296 @code{THREAD_MODEL_SPEC} such that it evaluates to a string without
297 blanks that names one of the recognized thread models. @code{%*}, the
298 default value of this macro, will expand to the value of
299 @code{thread_file} set in @file{config.gcc}.
300 @end defmac
301
302 @defmac SYSROOT_SUFFIX_SPEC
303 Define this macro to add a suffix to the target sysroot when GCC is
304 configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to search for usr/lib,
305 et al, within sysroot+suffix.
306 @end defmac
307
308 @defmac SYSROOT_HEADERS_SUFFIX_SPEC
309 Define this macro to add a headers_suffix to the target sysroot when
310 GCC is configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to pass the
311 updated sysroot+headers_suffix to CPP, causing it to search for
312 usr/include, et al, within sysroot+headers_suffix.
313 @end defmac
314
315 @defmac EXTRA_SPECS
316 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
317 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
318 @code{CC1_SPEC}.
319
320 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
321 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
322 string constant that provides the specification.
323
324 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
325
326 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
327 related targets, which have various @code{@dots{}_SPECS} which are similar
328 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
329 these definitions.
330
331 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
332 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
333 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
334 used.
335
336 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
337
338 @smallexample
339 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
340 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
341
342 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
343 @end smallexample
344
345 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
346 @smallexample
347 #undef CPP_SPEC
348 #define CPP_SPEC \
349 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
350 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} \
351 %@{!mcall-sysv: %(cpp_sysv_default) @} \
352 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
353
354 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
355 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
356 @end smallexample
357
358 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
359 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
360
361 @smallexample
362 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
363 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
364 @end smallexample
365 @end defmac
366
367 @defmac LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
368 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
369 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
370 the argument @option{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
371 @end defmac
372
373 @defmac LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC
374 The sequence in which libgcc and libc are specified to the linker.
375 By default this is @code{%G %L %G}.
376 @end defmac
377
378 @defmac LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
379 A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
380 linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
381 change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
382 define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
383 line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
384 the effect you need. Overriding this macro may be avoidable by overriding
385 @code{LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC} instead.
386 @end defmac
387
388 @hook TARGET_ALWAYS_STRIP_DOTDOT
389
390 @defmac MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
391 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
392 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
393 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
394 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
395
396 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
397 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
398 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
399 @xref{Target Fragment}.
400 @end defmac
401
402 @defmac RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
403 Define this macro to tell @command{gcc} that it should only translate
404 a @option{-B} prefix into a @option{-L} linker option if the prefix
405 indicates an absolute file name.
406 @end defmac
407
408 @defmac MD_EXEC_PREFIX
409 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
410 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
411 when the compiler is built as a cross
412 compiler. If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
413 to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.ac}.
414 @end defmac
415
416 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
417 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
418 standard choice of @code{libdir} as the default prefix to
419 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
420 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX} is not searched when the compiler
421 is built as a cross compiler.
422 @end defmac
423
424 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
425 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
426 standard choice of @code{/lib} as a prefix to try after the default prefix
427 when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
428 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1} is not searched when the compiler
429 is built as a cross compiler.
430 @end defmac
431
432 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2
433 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
434 standard choice of @code{/lib} as yet another prefix to try after the
435 default prefix when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
436 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2} is not searched when the compiler
437 is built as a cross compiler.
438 @end defmac
439
440 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
441 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
442 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
443 compiler is built as a cross compiler.
444 @end defmac
445
446 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
447 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
448 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the compiler is built as a
449 cross compiler.
450 @end defmac
451
452 @defmac INIT_ENVIRONMENT
453 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
454 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
455 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
456 initialize the necessary environment variables.
457 @end defmac
458
459 @defmac LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
460 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
461 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
462 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
463 comes before @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR} (set in
464 @file{config.gcc}, normally @file{/usr/include}) in the search order.
465
466 Cross compilers do not search either @file{/usr/local/include} or its
467 replacement.
468 @end defmac
469
470 @defmac NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_COMPONENT
471 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}.
472 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
473 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
474 @end defmac
475
476 @defmac INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
477 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
478 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
479 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
480 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
481 @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
482 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
483 and specify private search areas for GCC@. The directory
484 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
485
486 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
487 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
488 string constant), the component name (also a string constant), a flag
489 for C++-only directories,
490 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
491 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
492 the array with a null element.
493
494 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
495 if any, in all uppercase letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
496 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of a vendor-supplied
497 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
498
499 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
500
501 @smallexample
502 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
503 @{ \
504 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
505 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
506 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
507 @{ ".", 0, 0, 0@}, \
508 @{ 0, 0, 0, 0@} \
509 @}
510 @end smallexample
511 @end defmac
512
513 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
514
515 @enumerate
516 @item
517 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
518
519 @item
520 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or, if @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}
521 is not set and the compiler has not been installed in the configure-time
522 @var{prefix}, the location in which the compiler has actually been installed.
523
524 @item
525 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
526
527 @item
528 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if the compiler has been installed
529 in the configured-time @var{prefix}.
530
531 @item
532 The location @file{/usr/libexec/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
533
534 @item
535 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
536
537 @item
538 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
539 compiler.
540 @end enumerate
541
542 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
543
544 @enumerate
545 @item
546 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
547
548 @item
549 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or its automatically determined
550 value based on the installed toolchain location.
551
552 @item
553 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
554 (or port-specific name; native only, cross compilers do not use this).
555
556 @item
557 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, but only if the toolchain is installed
558 in the configured @var{prefix} or this is a native compiler.
559
560 @item
561 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
562
563 @item
564 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
565 compiler.
566
567 @item
568 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a
569 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
570
571 @item
572 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, if defined, but only if this is a
573 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
574
575 @item
576 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, with any sysroot modifications.
577 If this path is relative it will be prefixed by @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} and
578 the machine suffix or @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX} and the machine suffix.
579
580 @item
581 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, but only if this is a native
582 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
583 @file{/lib/}.
584
585 @item
586 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2}, but only if this is a native
587 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
588 @file{/usr/lib/}.
589 @end enumerate
590
591 @node Run-time Target
592 @section Run-time Target Specification
593 @cindex run-time target specification
594 @cindex predefined macros
595 @cindex target specifications
596
597 @c prevent bad page break with this line
598 Here are run-time target specifications.
599
600 @defmac TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS ()
601 This function-like macro expands to a block of code that defines
602 built-in preprocessor macros and assertions for the target CPU, using
603 the functions @code{builtin_define}, @code{builtin_define_std} and
604 @code{builtin_assert}. When the front end
605 calls this macro it provides a trailing semicolon, and since it has
606 finished command line option processing your code can use those
607 results freely.
608
609 @code{builtin_assert} takes a string in the form you pass to the
610 command-line option @option{-A}, such as @code{cpu=mips}, and creates
611 the assertion. @code{builtin_define} takes a string in the form
612 accepted by option @option{-D} and unconditionally defines the macro.
613
614 @code{builtin_define_std} takes a string representing the name of an
615 object-like macro. If it doesn't lie in the user's namespace,
616 @code{builtin_define_std} defines it unconditionally. Otherwise, it
617 defines a version with two leading underscores, and another version
618 with two leading and trailing underscores, and defines the original
619 only if an ISO standard was not requested on the command line. For
620 example, passing @code{unix} defines @code{__unix}, @code{__unix__}
621 and possibly @code{unix}; passing @code{_mips} defines @code{__mips},
622 @code{__mips__} and possibly @code{_mips}, and passing @code{_ABI64}
623 defines only @code{_ABI64}.
624
625 You can also test for the C dialect being compiled. The variable
626 @code{c_language} is set to one of @code{clk_c}, @code{clk_cplusplus}
627 or @code{clk_objective_c}. Note that if we are preprocessing
628 assembler, this variable will be @code{clk_c} but the function-like
629 macro @code{preprocessing_asm_p()} will return true, so you might want
630 to check for that first. If you need to check for strict ANSI, the
631 variable @code{flag_iso} can be used. The function-like macro
632 @code{preprocessing_trad_p()} can be used to check for traditional
633 preprocessing.
634 @end defmac
635
636 @defmac TARGET_OS_CPP_BUILTINS ()
637 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
638 and is used for the target operating system instead.
639 @end defmac
640
641 @defmac TARGET_OBJFMT_CPP_BUILTINS ()
642 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
643 and is used for the target object format. @file{elfos.h} uses this
644 macro to define @code{__ELF__}, so you probably do not need to define
645 it yourself.
646 @end defmac
647
648 @deftypevar {extern int} target_flags
649 This variable is declared in @file{options.h}, which is included before
650 any target-specific headers.
651 @end deftypevar
652
653 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_TARGET_FLAGS
654 This variable specifies the initial value of @code{target_flags}.
655 Its default setting is 0.
656 @end deftypevr
657
658 @cindex optional hardware or system features
659 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
660
661 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION
662 This hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
663 target-specific options described by the @file{.opt} definition files
664 (@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some option-specific
665 processing and should return true if the option is valid. The default
666 definition does nothing but return true.
667
668 @var{decoded} specifies the option and its arguments. @var{opts} and
669 @var{opts_set} are the @code{gcc_options} structures to be used for
670 storing option state, and @var{loc} is the location at which the
671 option was passed (@code{UNKNOWN_LOCATION} except for options passed
672 via attributes).
673 @end deftypefn
674
675 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION
676 This target hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
677 target-specific C language family options described by the @file{.opt}
678 definition files(@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some
679 option-specific processing and should return true if the option is
680 valid. The arguments are like for @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION}. The
681 default definition does nothing but return false.
682
683 In general, you should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION} to handle
684 options. However, if processing an option requires routines that are
685 only available in the C (and related language) front ends, then you
686 should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION} instead.
687 @end deftypefn
688
689 @hook TARGET_OBJC_CONSTRUCT_STRING_OBJECT
690
691 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_UNRESOLVED_CLASS_REFERENCE
692
693 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_CLASS_DEFINITION
694
695 @hook TARGET_STRING_OBJECT_REF_TYPE_P
696
697 @hook TARGET_CHECK_STRING_OBJECT_FORMAT_ARG
698
699 @hook TARGET_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS_AFTER_CHANGE
700
701 @defmac C_COMMON_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
702 This is similar to the @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE} hook
703 but is only used in the C
704 language frontends (C, Objective-C, C++, Objective-C++) and so can be
705 used to alter option flag variables which only exist in those
706 frontends.
707 @end defmac
708
709 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION_TABLE
710 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
711 various optimization levels. This variable, if defined, describes
712 options to enable at particular sets of optimization levels. These
713 options are processed once
714 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
715 of the command options have been parsed, so may be overridden by other
716 options passed explicitly.
717
718 This processing is run once at program startup and when the optimization
719 options are changed via @code{#pragma GCC optimize} or by using the
720 @code{optimize} attribute.
721 @end deftypevr
722
723 @hook TARGET_OPTION_INIT_STRUCT
724
725 @hook TARGET_OPTION_DEFAULT_PARAMS
726
727 @defmac SWITCHABLE_TARGET
728 Some targets need to switch between substantially different subtargets
729 during compilation. For example, the MIPS target has one subtarget for
730 the traditional MIPS architecture and another for MIPS16. Source code
731 can switch between these two subarchitectures using the @code{mips16}
732 and @code{nomips16} attributes.
733
734 Such subtargets can differ in things like the set of available
735 registers, the set of available instructions, the costs of various
736 operations, and so on. GCC caches a lot of this type of information
737 in global variables, and recomputing them for each subtarget takes a
738 significant amount of time. The compiler therefore provides a facility
739 for maintaining several versions of the global variables and quickly
740 switching between them; see @file{target-globals.h} for details.
741
742 Define this macro to 1 if your target needs this facility. The default
743 is 0.
744 @end defmac
745
746 @hook TARGET_FLOAT_EXCEPTIONS_ROUNDING_SUPPORTED_P
747
748 @node Per-Function Data
749 @section Defining data structures for per-function information.
750 @cindex per-function data
751 @cindex data structures
752
753 If the target needs to store information on a per-function basis, GCC
754 provides a macro and a couple of variables to allow this. Note, just
755 using statics to store the information is a bad idea, since GCC supports
756 nested functions, so you can be halfway through encoding one function
757 when another one comes along.
758
759 GCC defines a data structure called @code{struct function} which
760 contains all of the data specific to an individual function. This
761 structure contains a field called @code{machine} whose type is
762 @code{struct machine_function *}, which can be used by targets to point
763 to their own specific data.
764
765 If a target needs per-function specific data it should define the type
766 @code{struct machine_function} and also the macro @code{INIT_EXPANDERS}.
767 This macro should be used to initialize the function pointer
768 @code{init_machine_status}. This pointer is explained below.
769
770 One typical use of per-function, target specific data is to create an
771 RTX to hold the register containing the function's return address. This
772 RTX can then be used to implement the @code{__builtin_return_address}
773 function, for level 0.
774
775 Note---earlier implementations of GCC used a single data area to hold
776 all of the per-function information. Thus when processing of a nested
777 function began the old per-function data had to be pushed onto a
778 stack, and when the processing was finished, it had to be popped off the
779 stack. GCC used to provide function pointers called
780 @code{save_machine_status} and @code{restore_machine_status} to handle
781 the saving and restoring of the target specific information. Since the
782 single data area approach is no longer used, these pointers are no
783 longer supported.
784
785 @defmac INIT_EXPANDERS
786 Macro called to initialize any target specific information. This macro
787 is called once per function, before generation of any RTL has begun.
788 The intention of this macro is to allow the initialization of the
789 function pointer @code{init_machine_status}.
790 @end defmac
791
792 @deftypevar {void (*)(struct function *)} init_machine_status
793 If this function pointer is non-@code{NULL} it will be called once per
794 function, before function compilation starts, in order to allow the
795 target to perform any target specific initialization of the
796 @code{struct function} structure. It is intended that this would be
797 used to initialize the @code{machine} of that structure.
798
799 @code{struct machine_function} structures are expected to be freed by GC@.
800 Generally, any memory that they reference must be allocated by using
801 GC allocation, including the structure itself.
802 @end deftypevar
803
804 @node Storage Layout
805 @section Storage Layout
806 @cindex storage layout
807
808 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
809 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
810 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
811 @xref{Run-time Target}.
812
813 @defmac BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
814 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
815 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
816 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
817 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
818 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
819 macro need not be a constant.
820
821 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
822 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
823 @end defmac
824
825 @defmac BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
826 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
827 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
828 @end defmac
829
830 @defmac WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
831 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
832 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
833 memory locations and registers; see @code{REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} if the
834 order of words in memory is not the same as the order in registers. This
835 macro need not be a constant.
836 @end defmac
837
838 @defmac REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
839 On some machines, the order of words in a multiword object differs between
840 registers in memory. In such a situation, define this macro to describe
841 the order of words in a register. The macro @code{WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} controls
842 the order of words in memory.
843 @end defmac
844
845 @defmac FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
846 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
847 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
848 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
849 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
850
851 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
852 multi-word integers.
853 @end defmac
854
855 @defmac BITS_PER_WORD
856 Number of bits in a word. If you do not define this macro, the default
857 is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * UNITS_PER_WORD}.
858 @end defmac
859
860 @defmac MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
861 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
862 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
863 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
864 @end defmac
865
866 @defmac UNITS_PER_WORD
867 Number of storage units in a word; normally the size of a general-purpose
868 register, a power of two from 1 or 8.
869 @end defmac
870
871 @defmac MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
872 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
873 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
874 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
875 @end defmac
876
877 @defmac POINTER_SIZE
878 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
879 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
880 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}. If you do not specify
881 a value the default is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
882 @end defmac
883
884 @defmac POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
885 A C expression that determines how pointers should be extended from
886 @code{ptr_mode} to either @code{Pmode} or @code{word_mode}. It is
887 greater than zero if pointers should be zero-extended, zero if they
888 should be sign-extended, and negative if some other sort of conversion
889 is needed. In the last case, the extension is done by the target's
890 @code{ptr_extend} instruction.
891
892 You need not define this macro if the @code{ptr_mode}, @code{Pmode}
893 and @code{word_mode} are all the same width.
894 @end defmac
895
896 @defmac PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
897 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
898 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
899 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
900 scalar type.
901
902 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
903 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
904 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
905 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
906 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
907 counterparts.
908
909 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
910 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
911 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
912 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
913 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
914 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
915
916 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
917 @end defmac
918
919 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_MODE
920
921 @defmac PARM_BOUNDARY
922 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
923 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
924 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
925 size of an integer.
926 @end defmac
927
928 @defmac STACK_BOUNDARY
929 Define this macro to the minimum alignment enforced by hardware for the
930 stack pointer on this machine. The definition is a C expression for the
931 desired alignment (measured in bits). This value is used as a default
932 if @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY} is not defined. On most machines,
933 this should be the same as @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}.
934 @end defmac
935
936 @defmac PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
937 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for the
938 stack pointer, greater than what the hardware enforces. The definition
939 is a C expression for the desired alignment (measured in bits). This
940 macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger than
941 @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
942 @end defmac
943
944 @defmac INCOMING_STACK_BOUNDARY
945 Define this macro if the incoming stack boundary may be different
946 from @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}. This macro must evaluate
947 to a value equal to or larger than @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
948 @end defmac
949
950 @defmac FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
951 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
952 @end defmac
953
954 @defmac BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
955 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in
956 bits. Note that this is not the biggest alignment that is supported,
957 just the biggest alignment that, when violated, may cause a fault.
958 @end defmac
959
960 @hook TARGET_ABSOLUTE_BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
961
962 @defmac MALLOC_ABI_ALIGNMENT
963 Alignment, in bits, a C conformant malloc implementation has to
964 provide. If not defined, the default value is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
965 @end defmac
966
967 @defmac ATTRIBUTE_ALIGNED_VALUE
968 Alignment used by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned))} construct. If
969 not defined, the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
970 @end defmac
971
972 @defmac MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
973 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
974 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
975 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
976 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
977 @end defmac
978
979 @defmac BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
980 Biggest alignment that any structure or union field can require on this
981 machine, in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
982 structure and union fields only, unless the field alignment has been set
983 by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
984 @end defmac
985
986 @defmac ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{computed})
987 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} if the
988 alignment computed in the usual way (including applying of
989 @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} and @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT} to the
990 alignment) is @var{computed}. It overrides alignment only if the
991 field alignment has not been set by the
992 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
993 @end defmac
994
995 @defmac MAX_STACK_ALIGNMENT
996 Biggest stack alignment guaranteed by the backend. Use this macro
997 to specify the maximum alignment of a variable on stack.
998
999 If not defined, the default value is @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1000
1001 @c FIXME: The default should be @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1002 @c But the fix for PR 32893 indicates that we can only guarantee
1003 @c maximum stack alignment on stack up to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, not
1004 @c @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, if stack alignment isn't supported.
1005 @end defmac
1006
1007 @defmac MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
1008 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
1009 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
1010 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
1011 the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1012
1013 On systems that use ELF, the default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is
1014 the largest supported 32-bit ELF section alignment representable on
1015 a 32-bit host e.g. @samp{(((uint64_t) 1 << 28) * 8)}.
1016 On 32-bit ELF the largest supported section alignment in bits is
1017 @samp{(0x80000000 * 8)}, but this is not representable on 32-bit hosts.
1018 @end defmac
1019
1020 @defmac DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1021 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1022 the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1023 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1024 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1025
1026 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1027
1028 @findex strcpy
1029 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1030 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
1031 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1032 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
1033 @end defmac
1034
1035 @defmac DATA_ABI_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1036 Similar to @code{DATA_ALIGNMENT}, but for the cases where the ABI mandates
1037 some alignment increase, instead of optimization only purposes. E.g.@
1038 AMD x86-64 psABI says that variables with array type larger than 15 bytes
1039 must be aligned to 16 byte boundaries.
1040
1041 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1042 @end defmac
1043
1044 @defmac CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (@var{constant}, @var{basic-align})
1045 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment given to a constant
1046 that is being placed in memory. @var{constant} is the constant and
1047 @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the object would ordinarily
1048 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1049 align the object.
1050
1051 The default definition just returns @var{basic-align}.
1052
1053 The typical use of this macro is to increase alignment for string
1054 constants to be word aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1055 constants can be done inline.
1056 @end defmac
1057
1058 @defmac LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1059 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1060 the local store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1061 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1062 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1063
1064 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1065
1066 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1067 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1068
1069 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1070 @end defmac
1071
1072 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
1073
1074 @defmac STACK_SLOT_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{mode}, @var{basic-align})
1075 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for stack slot.
1076 @var{type} is the data type, @var{mode} is the widest mode available,
1077 and @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the slot would ordinarily
1078 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1079 align the slot.
1080
1081 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used when
1082 @var{type} is @code{NULL}. Otherwise, @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT} will
1083 be used.
1084
1085 This macro is to set alignment of stack slot to the maximum alignment
1086 of all possible modes which the slot may have.
1087
1088 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1089 @end defmac
1090
1091 @defmac LOCAL_DECL_ALIGNMENT (@var{decl})
1092 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a local
1093 variable @var{decl}.
1094
1095 If this macro is not defined, then
1096 @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (TREE_TYPE (@var{decl}), DECL_ALIGN (@var{decl}))}
1097 is used.
1098
1099 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1100 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1101
1102 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1103 @end defmac
1104
1105 @defmac MINIMUM_ALIGNMENT (@var{exp}, @var{mode}, @var{align})
1106 If defined, a C expression to compute the minimum required alignment
1107 for dynamic stack realignment purposes for @var{exp} (a type or decl),
1108 @var{mode}, assuming normal alignment @var{align}.
1109
1110 If this macro is not defined, then @var{align} will be used.
1111 @end defmac
1112
1113 @defmac EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
1114 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit-field that follows an
1115 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
1116
1117 If @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} is true, it overrides this macro.
1118 @end defmac
1119
1120 @defmac STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
1121 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
1122 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
1123
1124 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
1125 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1126 @end defmac
1127
1128 @defmac STRICT_ALIGNMENT
1129 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
1130 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
1131 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
1132 @end defmac
1133
1134 @defmac PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
1135 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
1136 alignment of bit-fields and the structures that contain them.
1137
1138 The behavior is that the type written for a named bit-field (@code{int},
1139 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the entire
1140 structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary field of
1141 that type. In addition, the bit-field is placed within the structure so
1142 that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a boundary for it.
1143
1144 Thus, on most machines, a named bit-field whose type is written as
1145 @code{int} would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force
1146 four-byte alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may
1147 not be four bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
1148
1149 An unnamed bit-field will not affect the alignment of the containing
1150 structure.
1151
1152 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
1153 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
1154
1155 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
1156 bit-fields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
1157 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
1158 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
1159
1160 The other known way of making bit-fields work is to define
1161 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1162 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
1163
1164 Unless the machine has bit-field instructions or you define
1165 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
1166 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
1167
1168 If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
1169 bit-fields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
1170 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
1171
1172 @smallexample
1173 struct foo1
1174 @{
1175 char x;
1176 char :0;
1177 char y;
1178 @};
1179
1180 struct foo2
1181 @{
1182 char x;
1183 int :0;
1184 char y;
1185 @};
1186
1187 main ()
1188 @{
1189 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
1190 sizeof (struct foo1));
1191 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
1192 sizeof (struct foo2));
1193 exit (0);
1194 @}
1195 @end smallexample
1196
1197 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
1198 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
1199 @end defmac
1200
1201 @defmac BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1202 Like @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} except that its effect is limited
1203 to aligning a bit-field within the structure.
1204 @end defmac
1205
1206 @hook TARGET_ALIGN_ANON_BITFIELD
1207
1208 @hook TARGET_NARROW_VOLATILE_BITFIELD
1209
1210 @hook TARGET_MEMBER_TYPE_FORCES_BLK
1211
1212 @defmac ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1213 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
1214 by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
1215 way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
1216 @var{specified}.
1217
1218 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
1219 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
1220 @end defmac
1221
1222 @defmac MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1223 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1224 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
1225 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1226 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1227 (DImode)} is assumed.
1228 @end defmac
1229
1230 @defmac STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1231 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1232 specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1233 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1234 @var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1235 @code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1236 having its mode specified.
1237
1238 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
1239 would most commonly define this macro if the
1240 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
1241 64-bit mode.
1242 @end defmac
1243
1244 @defmac STACK_SIZE_MODE
1245 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1246 specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1247 @code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1248
1249 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1250 You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1251 pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1252 @end defmac
1253
1254 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_CMP_RETURN_MODE
1255
1256 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_SHIFT_COUNT_MODE
1257
1258 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_WORD_MODE
1259
1260 @hook TARGET_MS_BITFIELD_LAYOUT_P
1261
1262 @hook TARGET_DECIMAL_FLOAT_SUPPORTED_P
1263
1264 @hook TARGET_FIXED_POINT_SUPPORTED_P
1265
1266 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_TO_RTL_HOOK
1267
1268 @hook TARGET_INSTANTIATE_DECLS
1269
1270 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE
1271
1272 @node Type Layout
1273 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1274
1275 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1276 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1277 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1278 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1279
1280 @defmac INT_TYPE_SIZE
1281 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1282 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1283 @end defmac
1284
1285 @defmac SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1286 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1287 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1288 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1289 unit.)
1290 @end defmac
1291
1292 @defmac LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1293 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1294 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1295 @end defmac
1296
1297 @defmac ADA_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1298 On some machines, the size used for the Ada equivalent of the type
1299 @code{long} by a native Ada compiler differs from that used by C@. In
1300 that situation, define this macro to be a C expression to be used for
1301 the size of that type. If you don't define this, the default is the
1302 value of @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}.
1303 @end defmac
1304
1305 @defmac LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1306 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1307 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1308 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of this
1309 macro must be at least 64.
1310 @end defmac
1311
1312 @defmac CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1313 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1314 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1315 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1316 @end defmac
1317
1318 @defmac BOOL_TYPE_SIZE
1319 A C expression for the size in bits of the C++ type @code{bool} and
1320 C99 type @code{_Bool} on the target machine. If you don't define
1321 this, and you probably shouldn't, the default is @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}.
1322 @end defmac
1323
1324 @defmac FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1325 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1326 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1327 @end defmac
1328
1329 @defmac DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1330 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1331 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1332 words.
1333 @end defmac
1334
1335 @defmac LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1336 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1337 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1338 words.
1339 @end defmac
1340
1341 @defmac SHORT_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1342 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Fract} on
1343 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1344 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1345 @end defmac
1346
1347 @defmac FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1348 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Fract} on
1349 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1350 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1351 @end defmac
1352
1353 @defmac LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1354 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Fract} on
1355 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1356 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1357 @end defmac
1358
1359 @defmac LONG_LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1360 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Fract} on
1361 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1362 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1363 @end defmac
1364
1365 @defmac SHORT_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1366 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Accum} on
1367 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1368 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1369 @end defmac
1370
1371 @defmac ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1372 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Accum} on
1373 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1374 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1375 @end defmac
1376
1377 @defmac LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1378 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Accum} on
1379 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1380 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1381 @end defmac
1382
1383 @defmac LONG_LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1384 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Accum} on
1385 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1386 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 16}.
1387 @end defmac
1388
1389 @defmac LIBGCC2_GNU_PREFIX
1390 This macro corresponds to the @code{TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX} target
1391 hook and should be defined if that hook is overriden to be true. It
1392 causes function names in libgcc to be changed to use a @code{__gnu_}
1393 prefix for their name rather than the default @code{__}. A port which
1394 uses this macro should also arrange to use @file{t-gnu-prefix} in
1395 the libgcc @file{config.host}.
1396 @end defmac
1397
1398 @defmac TARGET_FLT_EVAL_METHOD
1399 A C expression for the value for @code{FLT_EVAL_METHOD} in @file{float.h},
1400 assuming, if applicable, that the floating-point control word is in its
1401 default state. If you do not define this macro the value of
1402 @code{FLT_EVAL_METHOD} will be zero.
1403 @end defmac
1404
1405 @defmac WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1406 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1407 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1408 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1409 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1410 is the default.
1411 @end defmac
1412
1413 @defmac DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1414 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1415 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1416 always override this default with the options @option{-fsigned-char}
1417 and @option{-funsigned-char}.
1418 @end defmac
1419
1420 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1421
1422 @defmac SIZE_TYPE
1423 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1424 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1425 contents of the string.
1426
1427 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1428 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1429 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1430 of the data type names defined in the function
1431 @code{c_common_nodes_and_builtins} in the file @file{c-family/c-common.c}.
1432 You may not omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the
1433 compiler to crash on startup.
1434
1435 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1436 int"}.
1437 @end defmac
1438
1439 @defmac SIZETYPE
1440 GCC defines internal types (@code{sizetype}, @code{ssizetype},
1441 @code{bitsizetype} and @code{sbitsizetype}) for expressions
1442 dealing with size. This macro is a C expression for a string describing
1443 the name of the data type from which the precision of @code{sizetype}
1444 is extracted.
1445
1446 The string has the same restrictions as @code{SIZE_TYPE} string.
1447
1448 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{SIZE_TYPE}.
1449 @end defmac
1450
1451 @defmac PTRDIFF_TYPE
1452 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1453 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1454 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1455 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1456
1457 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1458 @end defmac
1459
1460 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE
1461 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1462 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1463 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1464 information.
1465
1466 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1467 @end defmac
1468
1469 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1470 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1471 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1472 @code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
1473 @end defmac
1474
1475 @defmac WINT_TYPE
1476 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to
1477 use for wide characters passed to @code{printf} and returned from
1478 @code{getwc}. The typedef name @code{wint_t} is defined using the
1479 contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1480 information.
1481
1482 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"unsigned int"}.
1483 @end defmac
1484
1485 @defmac INTMAX_TYPE
1486 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1487 can represent any value of any standard or extended signed integer type.
1488 The typedef name @code{intmax_t} is defined using the contents of the
1489 string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1490
1491 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1492 @code{"int"}, @code{"long int"}, or @code{"long long int"} that has as
1493 much precision as @code{long long int}.
1494 @end defmac
1495
1496 @defmac UINTMAX_TYPE
1497 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1498 can represent any value of any standard or extended unsigned integer
1499 type. The typedef name @code{uintmax_t} is defined using the contents
1500 of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1501
1502 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1503 @code{"unsigned int"}, @code{"long unsigned int"}, or @code{"long long
1504 unsigned int"} that has as much precision as @code{long long unsigned
1505 int}.
1506 @end defmac
1507
1508 @defmac SIG_ATOMIC_TYPE
1509 @defmacx INT8_TYPE
1510 @defmacx INT16_TYPE
1511 @defmacx INT32_TYPE
1512 @defmacx INT64_TYPE
1513 @defmacx UINT8_TYPE
1514 @defmacx UINT16_TYPE
1515 @defmacx UINT32_TYPE
1516 @defmacx UINT64_TYPE
1517 @defmacx INT_LEAST8_TYPE
1518 @defmacx INT_LEAST16_TYPE
1519 @defmacx INT_LEAST32_TYPE
1520 @defmacx INT_LEAST64_TYPE
1521 @defmacx UINT_LEAST8_TYPE
1522 @defmacx UINT_LEAST16_TYPE
1523 @defmacx UINT_LEAST32_TYPE
1524 @defmacx UINT_LEAST64_TYPE
1525 @defmacx INT_FAST8_TYPE
1526 @defmacx INT_FAST16_TYPE
1527 @defmacx INT_FAST32_TYPE
1528 @defmacx INT_FAST64_TYPE
1529 @defmacx UINT_FAST8_TYPE
1530 @defmacx UINT_FAST16_TYPE
1531 @defmacx UINT_FAST32_TYPE
1532 @defmacx UINT_FAST64_TYPE
1533 @defmacx INTPTR_TYPE
1534 @defmacx UINTPTR_TYPE
1535 C expressions for the standard types @code{sig_atomic_t},
1536 @code{int8_t}, @code{int16_t}, @code{int32_t}, @code{int64_t},
1537 @code{uint8_t}, @code{uint16_t}, @code{uint32_t}, @code{uint64_t},
1538 @code{int_least8_t}, @code{int_least16_t}, @code{int_least32_t},
1539 @code{int_least64_t}, @code{uint_least8_t}, @code{uint_least16_t},
1540 @code{uint_least32_t}, @code{uint_least64_t}, @code{int_fast8_t},
1541 @code{int_fast16_t}, @code{int_fast32_t}, @code{int_fast64_t},
1542 @code{uint_fast8_t}, @code{uint_fast16_t}, @code{uint_fast32_t},
1543 @code{uint_fast64_t}, @code{intptr_t}, and @code{uintptr_t}. See
1544 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1545
1546 If any of these macros evaluates to a null pointer, the corresponding
1547 type is not supported; if GCC is configured to provide
1548 @code{<stdint.h>} in such a case, the header provided may not conform
1549 to C99, depending on the type in question. The defaults for all of
1550 these macros are null pointers.
1551 @end defmac
1552
1553 @defmac TARGET_PTRMEMFUNC_VBIT_LOCATION
1554 The C++ compiler represents a pointer-to-member-function with a struct
1555 that looks like:
1556
1557 @smallexample
1558 struct @{
1559 union @{
1560 void (*fn)();
1561 ptrdiff_t vtable_index;
1562 @};
1563 ptrdiff_t delta;
1564 @};
1565 @end smallexample
1566
1567 @noindent
1568 The C++ compiler must use one bit to indicate whether the function that
1569 will be called through a pointer-to-member-function is virtual.
1570 Normally, we assume that the low-order bit of a function pointer must
1571 always be zero. Then, by ensuring that the vtable_index is odd, we can
1572 distinguish which variant of the union is in use. But, on some
1573 platforms function pointers can be odd, and so this doesn't work. In
1574 that case, we use the low-order bit of the @code{delta} field, and shift
1575 the remainder of the @code{delta} field to the left.
1576
1577 GCC will automatically make the right selection about where to store
1578 this bit using the @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY} setting for your platform.
1579 However, some platforms such as ARM/Thumb have @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}
1580 set such that functions always start at even addresses, but the lowest
1581 bit of pointers to functions indicate whether the function at that
1582 address is in ARM or Thumb mode. If this is the case of your
1583 architecture, you should define this macro to
1584 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_delta}.
1585
1586 In general, you should not have to define this macro. On architectures
1587 in which function addresses are always even, according to
1588 @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}, GCC will automatically define this macro to
1589 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_pfn}.
1590 @end defmac
1591
1592 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS
1593 Normally, the C++ compiler uses function pointers in vtables. This
1594 macro allows the target to change to use ``function descriptors''
1595 instead. Function descriptors are found on targets for whom a
1596 function pointer is actually a small data structure. Normally the
1597 data structure consists of the actual code address plus a data
1598 pointer to which the function's data is relative.
1599
1600 If vtables are used, the value of this macro should be the number
1601 of words that the function descriptor occupies.
1602 @end defmac
1603
1604 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN
1605 By default, the vtable entries are void pointers, the so the alignment
1606 is the same as pointer alignment. The value of this macro specifies
1607 the alignment of the vtable entry in bits. It should be defined only
1608 when special alignment is necessary. */
1609 @end defmac
1610
1611 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_DATA_ENTRY_DISTANCE
1612 There are a few non-descriptor entries in the vtable at offsets below
1613 zero. If these entries must be padded (say, to preserve the alignment
1614 specified by @code{TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN}), set this to the number
1615 of words in each data entry.
1616 @end defmac
1617
1618 @node Registers
1619 @section Register Usage
1620 @cindex register usage
1621
1622 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1623 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1624
1625 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1626 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1627 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1628 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1629 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1630
1631 @menu
1632 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1633 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1634 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1635 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1636 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1637 @end menu
1638
1639 @node Register Basics
1640 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1641
1642 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1643 Registers have various characteristics.
1644
1645 @defmac FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1646 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1647 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1648 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1649 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1650 @end defmac
1651
1652 @defmac FIXED_REGISTERS
1653 @cindex fixed register
1654 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1655 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1656 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1657 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1658 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1659 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1660 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1661
1662 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1663 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1664 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1665
1666 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1667 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1668 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1669 the user with the command options @option{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1670 @option{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @option{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1671 @end defmac
1672
1673 @defmac CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1674 @cindex call-used register
1675 @cindex call-clobbered register
1676 @cindex call-saved register
1677 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1678 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1679 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1680 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1681 function calls.
1682
1683 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1684 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1685 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1686 @end defmac
1687
1688 @defmac CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS
1689 @cindex call-used register
1690 @cindex call-clobbered register
1691 @cindex call-saved register
1692 Like @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} except this macro doesn't require
1693 that the entire set of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} be included.
1694 (@code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} must be a superset of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}).
1695 This macro is optional. If not specified, it defaults to the value
1696 of @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}.
1697 @end defmac
1698
1699 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1700 @cindex call-used register
1701 @cindex call-clobbered register
1702 @cindex call-saved register
1703 A C expression that is nonzero if it is not permissible to store a
1704 value of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} across a
1705 call without some part of it being clobbered. For most machines this
1706 macro need not be defined. It is only required for machines that do not
1707 preserve the entire contents of a register across a call.
1708 @end defmac
1709
1710 @findex fixed_regs
1711 @findex call_used_regs
1712 @findex global_regs
1713 @findex reg_names
1714 @findex reg_class_contents
1715 @hook TARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1716
1717 @defmac INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1718 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1719 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1720 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1721 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1722 outbound register.
1723 @end defmac
1724
1725 @defmac OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1726 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1727 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1728 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1729 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1730 register.
1731 @end defmac
1732
1733 @defmac LOCAL_REGNO (@var{regno})
1734 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1735 expression returns true if the register is call-saved but is in the
1736 register window. Unlike most call-saved registers, such registers
1737 need not be explicitly restored on function exit or during non-local
1738 gotos.
1739 @end defmac
1740
1741 @defmac PC_REGNUM
1742 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1743 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1744 @end defmac
1745
1746 @node Allocation Order
1747 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1748 @cindex order of register allocation
1749 @cindex register allocation order
1750
1751 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1752 Registers are allocated in order.
1753
1754 @defmac REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1755 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1756 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
1757 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1758
1759 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1760 (all else being equal).
1761
1762 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1763 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1764 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1765 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1766 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1767 @end defmac
1768
1769 @defmac ADJUST_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1770 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1771 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1772
1773 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1774 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1775 register; and so on.
1776
1777 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1778 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1779
1780 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1781 @end defmac
1782
1783 @defmac HONOR_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1784 Normally, IRA tries to estimate the costs for saving a register in the
1785 prologue and restoring it in the epilogue. This discourages it from
1786 using call-saved registers. If a machine wants to ensure that IRA
1787 allocates registers in the order given by REG_ALLOC_ORDER even if some
1788 call-saved registers appear earlier than call-used ones, then define this
1789 macro as a C expression to nonzero. Default is 0.
1790 @end defmac
1791
1792 @defmac IRA_HARD_REGNO_ADD_COST_MULTIPLIER (@var{regno})
1793 In some case register allocation order is not enough for the
1794 Integrated Register Allocator (@acronym{IRA}) to generate a good code.
1795 If this macro is defined, it should return a floating point value
1796 based on @var{regno}. The cost of using @var{regno} for a pseudo will
1797 be increased by approximately the pseudo's usage frequency times the
1798 value returned by this macro. Not defining this macro is equivalent
1799 to having it always return @code{0.0}.
1800
1801 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1802 @end defmac
1803
1804 @node Values in Registers
1805 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1806
1807 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1808 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1809 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1810
1811 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1812 A C expression for the number of consecutive hard registers, starting
1813 at register number @var{regno}, required to hold a value of mode
1814 @var{mode}. This macro must never return zero, even if a register
1815 cannot hold the requested mode - indicate that with HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1816 and/or CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS instead.
1817
1818 On a machine where all registers are exactly one word, a suitable
1819 definition of this macro is
1820
1821 @smallexample
1822 #define HARD_REGNO_NREGS(REGNO, MODE) \
1823 ((GET_MODE_SIZE (MODE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) \
1824 / UNITS_PER_WORD)
1825 @end smallexample
1826 @end defmac
1827
1828 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1829 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode @var{mode}, stored
1830 in memory, ends with padding that causes it to take up more space than
1831 in registers starting at register number @var{regno} (as determined by
1832 multiplying GCC's notion of the size of the register when containing
1833 this mode by the number of registers returned by
1834 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}). By default this is zero.
1835
1836 For example, if a floating-point value is stored in three 32-bit
1837 registers but takes up 128 bits in memory, then this would be
1838 nonzero.
1839
1840 This macros only needs to be defined if there are cases where
1841 @code{subreg_get_info}
1842 would otherwise wrongly determine that a @code{subreg} can be
1843 represented by an offset to the register number, when in fact such a
1844 @code{subreg} would contain some of the padding not stored in
1845 registers and so not be representable.
1846 @end defmac
1847
1848 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_WITH_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1849 For values of @var{regno} and @var{mode} for which
1850 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING} returns nonzero, a C expression
1851 returning the greater number of registers required to hold the value
1852 including any padding. In the example above, the value would be four.
1853 @end defmac
1854
1855 @defmac REGMODE_NATURAL_SIZE (@var{mode})
1856 Define this macro if the natural size of registers that hold values
1857 of mode @var{mode} is not the word size. It is a C expression that
1858 should give the natural size in bytes for the specified mode. It is
1859 used by the register allocator to try to optimize its results. This
1860 happens for example on SPARC 64-bit where the natural size of
1861 floating-point registers is still 32-bit.
1862 @end defmac
1863
1864 @defmac HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1865 A C expression that is nonzero if it is permissible to store a value
1866 of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} (or in several
1867 registers starting with that one). For a machine where all registers
1868 are equivalent, a suitable definition is
1869
1870 @smallexample
1871 #define HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK(REGNO, MODE) 1
1872 @end smallexample
1873
1874 You need not include code to check for the numbers of fixed registers,
1875 because the allocation mechanism considers them to be always occupied.
1876
1877 @cindex register pairs
1878 On some machines, double-precision values must be kept in even/odd
1879 register pairs. You can implement that by defining this macro to reject
1880 odd register numbers for such modes.
1881
1882 The minimum requirement for a mode to be OK in a register is that the
1883 @samp{mov@var{mode}} instruction pattern support moves between the
1884 register and other hard register in the same class and that moving a
1885 value into the register and back out not alter it.
1886
1887 Since the same instruction used to move @code{word_mode} will work for
1888 all narrower integer modes, it is not necessary on any machine for
1889 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} to distinguish between these modes, provided
1890 you define patterns @samp{movhi}, etc., to take advantage of this. This
1891 is useful because of the interaction between @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}
1892 and @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P}; it is very desirable for all integer modes
1893 to be tieable.
1894
1895 Many machines have special registers for floating point arithmetic.
1896 Often people assume that floating point machine modes are allowed only
1897 in floating point registers. This is not true. Any registers that
1898 can hold integers can safely @emph{hold} a floating point machine
1899 mode, whether or not floating arithmetic can be done on it in those
1900 registers. Integer move instructions can be used to move the values.
1901
1902 On some machines, though, the converse is true: fixed-point machine
1903 modes may not go in floating registers. This is true if the floating
1904 registers normalize any value stored in them, because storing a
1905 non-floating value there would garble it. In this case,
1906 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} should reject fixed-point machine modes in
1907 floating registers. But if the floating registers do not automatically
1908 normalize, if you can store any bit pattern in one and retrieve it
1909 unchanged without a trap, then any machine mode may go in a floating
1910 register, so you can define this macro to say so.
1911
1912 The primary significance of special floating registers is rather that
1913 they are the registers acceptable in floating point arithmetic
1914 instructions. However, this is of no concern to
1915 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}. You handle it by writing the proper
1916 constraints for those instructions.
1917
1918 On some machines, the floating registers are especially slow to access,
1919 so that it is better to store a value in a stack frame than in such a
1920 register if floating point arithmetic is not being done. As long as the
1921 floating registers are not in class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, they will not
1922 be used unless some pattern's constraint asks for one.
1923 @end defmac
1924
1925 @defmac HARD_REGNO_RENAME_OK (@var{from}, @var{to})
1926 A C expression that is nonzero if it is OK to rename a hard register
1927 @var{from} to another hard register @var{to}.
1928
1929 One common use of this macro is to prevent renaming of a register to
1930 another register that is not saved by a prologue in an interrupt
1931 handler.
1932
1933 The default is always nonzero.
1934 @end defmac
1935
1936 @defmac MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})
1937 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode
1938 @var{mode1} is accessible in mode @var{mode2} without copying.
1939
1940 If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode1})} and
1941 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode2})} are always the same for
1942 any @var{r}, then @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})}
1943 should be nonzero. If they differ for any @var{r}, you should define
1944 this macro to return zero unless some other mechanism ensures the
1945 accessibility of the value in a narrower mode.
1946
1947 You should define this macro to return nonzero in as many cases as
1948 possible since doing so will allow GCC to perform better register
1949 allocation.
1950 @end defmac
1951
1952 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_SCRATCH_OK
1953
1954 @defmac AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1955 Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
1956 registers. You should only define this macro if support for copying to/from
1957 @code{CCmode} is incomplete.
1958 @end defmac
1959
1960 @node Leaf Functions
1961 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1962
1963 @cindex leaf functions
1964 @cindex functions, leaf
1965 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1966 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1967 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1968 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1969 normally arrive.
1970
1971 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1972 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1973 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1974 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1975 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1976 functions''.
1977
1978 GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1979 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1980 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1981 accomplish this.
1982
1983 @defmac LEAF_REGISTERS
1984 Name of a char vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1985 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1986 function treatment.
1987
1988 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1989 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1990 GCC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1991 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1992 in this vector.
1993
1994 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
1995 the treatment of leaf functions.
1996 @end defmac
1997
1998 @defmac LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
1999 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
2000 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
2001
2002 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
2003 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield @minus{}1, which
2004 will cause the compiler to abort.
2005
2006 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
2007 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
2008 this.
2009 @end defmac
2010
2011 @findex current_function_is_leaf
2012 @findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
2013 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
2014 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must usually treat leaf functions
2015 specially. They can test the C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
2016 which is nonzero for leaf functions. @code{current_function_is_leaf} is
2017 set prior to local register allocation and is valid for the remaining
2018 compiler passes. They can also test the C variable
2019 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for leaf
2020 functions which only use leaf registers.
2021 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after all passes
2022 that modify the instructions have been run and is only useful if
2023 @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
2024 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
2025 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
2026
2027 @node Stack Registers
2028 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
2029
2030 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
2031 ``registers'' form a stack. Stack registers are normally written by
2032 pushing onto the stack, and are numbered relative to the top of the
2033 stack.
2034
2035 Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
2036 they must be consecutively numbered. Furthermore, the existing
2037 support for stack-like registers is specific to the 80387 floating
2038 point coprocessor. If you have a new architecture that uses
2039 stack-like registers, you will need to do substantial work on
2040 @file{reg-stack.c} and write your machine description to cooperate
2041 with it, as well as defining these macros.
2042
2043 @defmac STACK_REGS
2044 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
2045 @end defmac
2046
2047 @defmac STACK_REG_COVER_CLASS
2048 This is a cover class containing the stack registers. Define this if
2049 the machine has any stack-like registers.
2050 @end defmac
2051
2052 @defmac FIRST_STACK_REG
2053 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
2054 of the stack.
2055 @end defmac
2056
2057 @defmac LAST_STACK_REG
2058 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
2059 the stack.
2060 @end defmac
2061
2062 @node Register Classes
2063 @section Register Classes
2064 @cindex register class definitions
2065 @cindex class definitions, register
2066
2067 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
2068 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
2069 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
2070 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
2071
2072 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
2073 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
2074 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
2075
2076 @findex ALL_REGS
2077 @findex NO_REGS
2078 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
2079 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
2080 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
2081 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
2082
2083 @findex GENERAL_REGS
2084 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
2085 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
2086 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
2087 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
2088 to @code{ALL_REGS}.
2089
2090 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
2091 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
2092
2093 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
2094 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
2095 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
2096 them in operand constraints.
2097
2098 You must define the narrowest register classes for allocatable
2099 registers, so that each class either has no subclasses, or that for
2100 some mode, the move cost between registers within the class is
2101 cheaper than moving a register in the class to or from memory
2102 (@pxref{Costs}).
2103
2104 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
2105 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
2106 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
2107 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
2108 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code,
2109 or even internal compiler errors when reload cannot find a register in the
2110 class computed via @code{reg_class_subunion}.
2111
2112 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
2113 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
2114 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
2115 in their union.
2116
2117 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
2118 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
2119 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
2120 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
2121 specify this requirement is with @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
2122
2123 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
2124 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
2125 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
2126 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
2127 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
2128 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
2129 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
2130 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
2131 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
2132
2133 @deftp {Data type} {enum reg_class}
2134 An enumerated type that must be defined with all the register class names
2135 as enumerated values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
2136 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumerated value,
2137 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
2138 tells how many classes there are.
2139
2140 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
2141 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
2142 in many of the tables described below.
2143 @end deftp
2144
2145 @defmac N_REG_CLASSES
2146 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
2147
2148 @smallexample
2149 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
2150 @end smallexample
2151 @end defmac
2152
2153 @defmac REG_CLASS_NAMES
2154 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
2155 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
2156 @end defmac
2157
2158 @defmac REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
2159 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
2160 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
2161 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
2162 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
2163
2164 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
2165 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
2166 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
2167 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
2168 In this situation, the first integer in each sub-initializer corresponds to
2169 registers 0 through 31, the second integer to registers 32 through 63, and
2170 so on.
2171 @end defmac
2172
2173 @defmac REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
2174 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
2175 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
2176 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
2177 register.
2178 @end defmac
2179
2180 @defmac BASE_REG_CLASS
2181 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2182 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
2183 which is the register value plus a displacement.
2184 @end defmac
2185
2186 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2187 This is a variation of the @code{BASE_REG_CLASS} macro which allows
2188 the selection of a base register in a mode dependent manner. If
2189 @var{mode} is VOIDmode then it should return the same value as
2190 @code{BASE_REG_CLASS}.
2191 @end defmac
2192
2193 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2194 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2195 base register must belong in order to be used in a base plus index
2196 register address. You should define this macro if base plus index
2197 addresses have different requirements than other base register uses.
2198 @end defmac
2199
2200 @defmac MODE_CODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2201 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2202 base register for a memory reference in mode @var{mode} to address
2203 space @var{address_space} must belong. @var{outer_code} and @var{index_code}
2204 define the context in which the base register occurs. @var{outer_code} is
2205 the code of the immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} for the top level
2206 of an address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2207 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the corresponding
2208 index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS}; @code{SCRATCH} otherwise.
2209 @end defmac
2210
2211 @defmac INDEX_REG_CLASS
2212 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2213 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
2214 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
2215 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
2216 @end defmac
2217
2218 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
2219 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2220 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses.
2221 @end defmac
2222
2223 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2224 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
2225 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
2226 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
2227 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
2228 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
2229 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for
2230 addresses that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an
2231 @code{address_operand}.
2232 @end defmac
2233
2234 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_REG_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2235 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is suitable for
2236 use as a base register in base plus index operand addresses, accessing
2237 memory in mode @var{mode}. It may be either a suitable hard register or a
2238 pseudo register that has been allocated such a hard register. You should
2239 define this macro if base plus index addresses have different requirements
2240 than other base register uses.
2241
2242 Use of this macro is deprecated; please use the more general
2243 @code{REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
2244 @end defmac
2245
2246 @defmac REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2247 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2248 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses, accessing
2249 memory in mode @var{mode} in address space @var{address_space}.
2250 This is similar to @code{REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except
2251 that that expression may examine the context in which the register
2252 appears in the memory reference. @var{outer_code} is the code of the
2253 immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} if at the top level of the
2254 address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2255 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the
2256 corresponding index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS};
2257 @code{SCRATCH} otherwise. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for addresses
2258 that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an @code{address_operand}.
2259 @end defmac
2260
2261 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
2262 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2263 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
2264 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
2265 allocated such a hard register.
2266
2267 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
2268 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
2269 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
2270 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
2271 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
2272 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
2273 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
2274 only if neither labeling works.
2275 @end defmac
2276
2277 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RENAME_CLASS
2278
2279 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
2280
2281 @defmac PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
2282 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2283 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
2284 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
2285 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
2286 safe:
2287
2288 @smallexample
2289 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
2290 @end smallexample
2291
2292 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
2293 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
2294 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
2295 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
2296 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
2297
2298 One case where @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} must not return
2299 @var{class} is if @var{x} is a legitimate constant which cannot be
2300 loaded into some register class. By returning @code{NO_REGS} you can
2301 force @var{x} into a memory location. For example, rs6000 can load
2302 immediate values into general-purpose registers, but does not have an
2303 instruction for loading an immediate value into a floating-point
2304 register, so @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} returns @code{NO_REGS} when
2305 @var{x} is a floating-point constant. If the constant can't be loaded
2306 into any kind of register, code generation will be better if
2307 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P} makes the constant illegitimate instead
2308 of using @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}.
2309
2310 If an insn has pseudos in it after register allocation, reload will go
2311 through the alternatives and call repeatedly @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}
2312 to find the best one. Returning @code{NO_REGS}, in this case, makes
2313 reload add a @code{!} in front of the constraint: the x86 back-end uses
2314 this feature to discourage usage of 387 registers when math is done in
2315 the SSE registers (and vice versa).
2316 @end defmac
2317
2318 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
2319
2320 @defmac LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
2321 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2322 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
2323 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
2324 ordinarily be used.
2325
2326 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
2327 there are certain modes that simply can't go in certain reload classes.
2328
2329 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
2330 smaller class.
2331
2332 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
2333 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
2334 @end defmac
2335
2336 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD
2337
2338 @defmac SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2339 @defmacx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2340 @defmacx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2341 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
2342 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD} instead.
2343
2344 These are obsolete macros, replaced by the @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD}
2345 target hook. Older ports still define these macros to indicate to the
2346 reload phase that it may
2347 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
2348 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
2349 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
2350 you were supposed to define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
2351 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
2352 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
2353
2354 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
2355 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
2356 was supposed to be defined be defined to return the largest register
2357 class required. If the
2358 requirements for input and output reloads were the same, the macro
2359 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should have been used instead of defining both
2360 macros identically.
2361
2362 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
2363 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
2364 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
2365 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
2366 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
2367
2368 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
2369 intermediate register), you were supposed to define patterns for
2370 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
2371 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which were normally
2372 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
2373 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
2374 register.
2375
2376 These patterns need constraints for the reload register and scratch
2377 register that
2378 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
2379 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
2380 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
2381 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
2382 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
2383
2384 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
2385 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
2386 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return @minus{}1 if the pseudo is
2387 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
2388
2389 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
2390 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
2391 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
2392 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
2393 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as an
2394 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
2395 general registers.
2396 @end defmac
2397
2398 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (@var{class1}, @var{class2}, @var{m})
2399 Certain machines have the property that some registers cannot be copied
2400 to some other registers without using memory. Define this macro on
2401 those machines to be a C expression that is nonzero if objects of mode
2402 @var{m} in registers of @var{class1} can only be copied to registers of
2403 class @var{class2} by storing a register of @var{class1} into memory
2404 and loading that memory location into a register of @var{class2}.
2405
2406 Do not define this macro if its value would always be zero.
2407 @end defmac
2408
2409 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
2410 Normally when @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
2411 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
2412 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
2413 defined by this macro.
2414
2415 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2416 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
2417 @end defmac
2418
2419 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE (@var{mode})
2420 When the compiler needs a secondary memory location to copy between two
2421 registers of mode @var{mode}, it normally allocates sufficient memory to
2422 hold a quantity of @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits and performs the store and
2423 load operations in a mode that many bits wide and whose class is the
2424 same as that of @var{mode}.
2425
2426 This is right thing to do on most machines because it ensures that all
2427 bits of the register are copied and prevents accesses to the registers
2428 in a narrower mode, which some machines prohibit for floating-point
2429 registers.
2430
2431 However, this default behavior is not correct on some machines, such as
2432 the DEC Alpha, that store short integers in floating-point registers
2433 differently than in integer registers. On those machines, the default
2434 widening will not work correctly and you must define this macro to
2435 suppress that widening in some cases. See the file @file{alpha.h} for
2436 details.
2437
2438 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2439 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} or if widening @var{mode} to a mode that
2440 is @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits wide is correct for your machine.
2441 @end defmac
2442
2443 @hook TARGET_CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2444
2445 @hook TARGET_CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2446
2447 @defmac CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2448 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2449 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2450
2451 This is closely related to the macro @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2452 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2453 should be the maximum value of @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2454 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2455
2456 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2457 in the reload pass.
2458 @end defmac
2459
2460 @defmac CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS (@var{from}, @var{to}, @var{class})
2461 If defined, a C expression that returns nonzero for a @var{class} for which
2462 a change from mode @var{from} to mode @var{to} is invalid.
2463
2464 For the example, loading 32-bit integer or floating-point objects into
2465 floating-point registers on the Alpha extends them to 64 bits.
2466 Therefore loading a 64-bit object and then storing it as a 32-bit object
2467 does not store the low-order 32 bits, as would be the case for a normal
2468 register. Therefore, @file{alpha.h} defines @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS}
2469 as below:
2470
2471 @smallexample
2472 #define CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS(FROM, TO, CLASS) \
2473 (GET_MODE_SIZE (FROM) != GET_MODE_SIZE (TO) \
2474 ? reg_classes_intersect_p (FLOAT_REGS, (CLASS)) : 0)
2475 @end smallexample
2476 @end defmac
2477
2478 @hook TARGET_IRA_CHANGE_PSEUDO_ALLOCNO_CLASS
2479
2480 @hook TARGET_LRA_P
2481
2482 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_PRIORITY
2483
2484 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_USAGE_LEVELING_P
2485
2486 @hook TARGET_DIFFERENT_ADDR_DISPLACEMENT_P
2487
2488 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_SUBSTITUTE_MEM_EQUIV_P
2489
2490 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS_DISPLACEMENT
2491
2492 @hook TARGET_SPILL_CLASS
2493
2494 @hook TARGET_CSTORE_MODE
2495
2496 @node Stack and Calling
2497 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2498 @cindex calling conventions
2499
2500 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2501 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2502
2503 @menu
2504 * Frame Layout::
2505 * Exception Handling::
2506 * Stack Checking::
2507 * Frame Registers::
2508 * Elimination::
2509 * Stack Arguments::
2510 * Register Arguments::
2511 * Scalar Return::
2512 * Aggregate Return::
2513 * Caller Saves::
2514 * Function Entry::
2515 * Profiling::
2516 * Tail Calls::
2517 * Stack Smashing Protection::
2518 * Miscellaneous Register Hooks::
2519 @end menu
2520
2521 @node Frame Layout
2522 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2523 @cindex stack frame layout
2524 @cindex frame layout
2525
2526 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2527 Here is the basic stack layout.
2528
2529 @defmac STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2530 Define this macro to be true if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2531 pointer to a smaller address, and false otherwise.
2532 @end defmac
2533
2534 @defmac STACK_PUSH_CODE
2535 This macro defines the operation used when something is pushed
2536 on the stack. In RTL, a push operation will be
2537 @code{(set (mem (STACK_PUSH_CODE (reg sp))) @dots{})}
2538
2539 The choices are @code{PRE_DEC}, @code{POST_DEC}, @code{PRE_INC},
2540 and @code{POST_INC}. Which of these is correct depends on
2541 the stack direction and on whether the stack pointer points
2542 to the last item on the stack or whether it points to the
2543 space for the next item on the stack.
2544
2545 The default is @code{PRE_DEC} when @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is
2546 true, which is almost always right, and @code{PRE_INC} otherwise,
2547 which is often wrong.
2548 @end defmac
2549
2550 @defmac FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2551 Define this macro to nonzero value if the addresses of local variable slots
2552 are at negative offsets from the frame pointer.
2553 @end defmac
2554
2555 @defmac ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2556 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2557 addresses on the stack.
2558 @end defmac
2559
2560 @defmac STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2561 Offset from the frame pointer to the first local variable slot to be allocated.
2562
2563 If @code{FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD}, find the next slot's offset by
2564 subtracting the first slot's length from @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2565 Otherwise, it is found by adding the length of the first slot to the
2566 value @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2567 @c i'm not sure if the above is still correct.. had to change it to get
2568 @c rid of an overfull. --mew 2feb93
2569 @end defmac
2570
2571 @defmac STACK_ALIGNMENT_NEEDED
2572 Define to zero to disable final alignment of the stack during reload.
2573 The nonzero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2574
2575 On ports where @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET} is nonzero or where there
2576 is a register save block following the local block that doesn't require
2577 alignment to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, it may be beneficial to disable
2578 stack alignment and do it in the backend.
2579 @end defmac
2580
2581 @defmac STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2582 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2583 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2584 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2585
2586 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2587 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2588 @end defmac
2589
2590 @defmac FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2591 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2592 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2593 function.
2594
2595 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2596 the first argument's address.
2597 @end defmac
2598
2599 @defmac STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2600 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2601 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2602
2603 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2604 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2605 machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2606 @end defmac
2607
2608 @defmac INITIAL_FRAME_ADDRESS_RTX
2609 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address of the initial
2610 stack frame. This address is passed to @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and
2611 @code{DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS}. If you don't define this macro, a reasonable
2612 default value will be used. Define this macro in order to make frame pointer
2613 elimination work in the presence of @code{__builtin_frame_address (count)} and
2614 @code{__builtin_return_address (count)} for @code{count} not equal to zero.
2615 @end defmac
2616
2617 @defmac DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2618 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2619 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2620 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2621 itself.
2622
2623 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2624 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2625 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2626 @end defmac
2627
2628 @defmac SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2629 If defined, a C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2630 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2631 on the SPARC, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2632 before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2633 define this macro.
2634 @end defmac
2635
2636 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2637
2638 @defmac FRAME_ADDR_RTX (@var{frameaddr})
2639 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the frame
2640 address for the current frame. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer
2641 of the current frame. This is used for __builtin_frame_address.
2642 You need only define this macro if the frame address is not the same
2643 as the frame pointer. Most machines do not need to define it.
2644 @end defmac
2645
2646 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2647 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2648 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2649 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2650 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2651 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is nonzero.
2652
2653 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2654 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is no way to
2655 determine the return address of other frames.
2656 @end defmac
2657
2658 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2659 Define this macro to nonzero value if the return address of a particular
2660 stack frame is accessed from the frame pointer of the previous stack
2661 frame. The zero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2662 @end defmac
2663
2664 @defmac INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2665 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2666 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2667 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2668 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2669 the stack.
2670
2671 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2672 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2673
2674 If this RTL is a @code{REG}, you should also define
2675 @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (REGNO)}.
2676 @end defmac
2677
2678 @defmac DWARF_ALT_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN
2679 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 column
2680 number that may be used as an alternative return column. The column
2681 must not correspond to any gcc hard register (that is, it must not
2682 be in the range of @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM}).
2683
2684 This macro can be useful if @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} is set to a
2685 general register, but an alternative column needs to be used for signal
2686 frames. Some targets have also used different frame return columns
2687 over time.
2688 @end defmac
2689
2690 @defmac DWARF_ZERO_REG
2691 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 register
2692 number that is considered to always have the value zero. This should
2693 only be defined if the target has an architected zero register, and
2694 someone decided it was a good idea to use that register number to
2695 terminate the stack backtrace. New ports should avoid this.
2696 @end defmac
2697
2698 @hook TARGET_DWARF_HANDLE_FRAME_UNSPEC
2699
2700 @defmac INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2701 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2702 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2703 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2704 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2705 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2706
2707 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2708 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2709 @end defmac
2710
2711 @defmac ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2712 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2713 from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2714 final value should coincide with that calculated by
2715 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2716 during virtual register instantiation.
2717
2718 The default value for this macro is
2719 @code{FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (fundecl) + crtl->args.pretend_args_size},
2720 which is correct for most machines; in general, the arguments are found
2721 immediately before the stack frame. Note that this is not the case on
2722 some targets that save registers into the caller's frame, such as SPARC
2723 and rs6000, and so such targets need to define this macro.
2724
2725 You only need to define this macro if the default is incorrect, and you
2726 want to support call frame debugging information like that provided by
2727 DWARF 2.
2728 @end defmac
2729
2730 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2731 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2732 in bytes from the frame pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa).
2733 The final value should coincide with that calculated by
2734 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}.
2735
2736 Normally the CFA is calculated as an offset from the argument pointer,
2737 via @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}, but if the argument pointer is
2738 variable due to the ABI, this may not be possible. If this macro is
2739 defined, it implies that the virtual register instantiation should be
2740 based on the frame pointer instead of the argument pointer. Only one
2741 of @code{FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET} and @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}
2742 should be defined.
2743 @end defmac
2744
2745 @defmac CFA_FRAME_BASE_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2746 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2747 in bytes from the canonical frame address (cfa) to the frame base used
2748 in DWARF 2 debug information. The default is zero. A different value
2749 may reduce the size of debug information on some ports.
2750 @end defmac
2751
2752 @node Exception Handling
2753 @subsection Exception Handling Support
2754 @cindex exception handling
2755
2756 @defmac EH_RETURN_DATA_REGNO (@var{N})
2757 A C expression whose value is the @var{N}th register number used for
2758 data by exception handlers, or @code{INVALID_REGNUM} if fewer than
2759 @var{N} registers are usable.
2760
2761 The exception handling library routines communicate with the exception
2762 handlers via a set of agreed upon registers. Ideally these registers
2763 should be call-clobbered; it is possible to use call-saved registers,
2764 but may negatively impact code size. The target must support at least
2765 2 data registers, but should define 4 if there are enough free registers.
2766
2767 You must define this macro if you want to support call frame exception
2768 handling like that provided by DWARF 2.
2769 @end defmac
2770
2771 @defmac EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX
2772 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2773 to store a stack adjustment to be applied before function return.
2774 This is used to unwind the stack to an exception handler's call frame.
2775 It will be assigned zero on code paths that return normally.
2776
2777 Typically this is a call-clobbered hard register that is otherwise
2778 untouched by the epilogue, but could also be a stack slot.
2779
2780 Do not define this macro if the stack pointer is saved and restored
2781 by the regular prolog and epilog code in the call frame itself; in
2782 this case, the exception handling library routines will update the
2783 stack location to be restored in place. Otherwise, you must define
2784 this macro if you want to support call frame exception handling like
2785 that provided by DWARF 2.
2786 @end defmac
2787
2788 @defmac EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX
2789 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2790 to store the address of an exception handler to which we should
2791 return. It will not be assigned on code paths that return normally.
2792
2793 Typically this is the location in the call frame at which the normal
2794 return address is stored. For targets that return by popping an
2795 address off the stack, this might be a memory address just below
2796 the @emph{target} call frame rather than inside the current call
2797 frame. If defined, @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX} will have already
2798 been assigned, so it may be used to calculate the location of the
2799 target call frame.
2800
2801 Some targets have more complex requirements than storing to an
2802 address calculable during initial code generation. In that case
2803 the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern should be used instead.
2804
2805 If you want to support call frame exception handling, you must
2806 define either this macro or the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern.
2807 @end defmac
2808
2809 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_OFFSET
2810 If defined, an integer-valued C expression for which rtl will be generated
2811 to add it to the exception handler address before it is searched in the
2812 exception handling tables, and to subtract it again from the address before
2813 using it to return to the exception handler.
2814 @end defmac
2815
2816 @defmac ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT (@var{code}, @var{global})
2817 This macro chooses the encoding of pointers embedded in the exception
2818 handling sections. If at all possible, this should be defined such
2819 that the exception handling section will not require dynamic relocations,
2820 and so may be read-only.
2821
2822 @var{code} is 0 for data, 1 for code labels, 2 for function pointers.
2823 @var{global} is true if the symbol may be affected by dynamic relocations.
2824 The macro should return a combination of the @code{DW_EH_PE_*} defines
2825 as found in @file{dwarf2.h}.
2826
2827 If this macro is not defined, pointers will not be encoded but
2828 represented directly.
2829 @end defmac
2830
2831 @defmac ASM_MAYBE_OUTPUT_ENCODED_ADDR_RTX (@var{file}, @var{encoding}, @var{size}, @var{addr}, @var{done})
2832 This macro allows the target to emit whatever special magic is required
2833 to represent the encoding chosen by @code{ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT}.
2834 Generic code takes care of pc-relative and indirect encodings; this must
2835 be defined if the target uses text-relative or data-relative encodings.
2836
2837 This is a C statement that branches to @var{done} if the format was
2838 handled. @var{encoding} is the format chosen, @var{size} is the number
2839 of bytes that the format occupies, @var{addr} is the @code{SYMBOL_REF}
2840 to be emitted.
2841 @end defmac
2842
2843 @defmac MD_FALLBACK_FRAME_STATE_FOR (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2844 This macro allows the target to add CPU and operating system specific
2845 code to the call-frame unwinder for use when there is no unwind data
2846 available. The most common reason to implement this macro is to unwind
2847 through signal frames.
2848
2849 This macro is called from @code{uw_frame_state_for} in
2850 @file{unwind-dw2.c}, @file{unwind-dw2-xtensa.c} and
2851 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2852 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{context->ra}
2853 for the address of the code being executed and @code{context->cfa} for
2854 the stack pointer value. If the frame can be decoded, the register
2855 save addresses should be updated in @var{fs} and the macro should
2856 evaluate to @code{_URC_NO_REASON}. If the frame cannot be decoded,
2857 the macro should evaluate to @code{_URC_END_OF_STACK}.
2858
2859 For proper signal handling in Java this macro is accompanied by
2860 @code{MAKE_THROW_FRAME}, defined in @file{libjava/include/*-signal.h} headers.
2861 @end defmac
2862
2863 @defmac MD_HANDLE_UNWABI (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2864 This macro allows the target to add operating system specific code to the
2865 call-frame unwinder to handle the IA-64 @code{.unwabi} unwinding directive,
2866 usually used for signal or interrupt frames.
2867
2868 This macro is called from @code{uw_update_context} in libgcc's
2869 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2870 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{fs->unwabi}
2871 for the abi and context in the @code{.unwabi} directive. If the
2872 @code{.unwabi} directive can be handled, the register save addresses should
2873 be updated in @var{fs}.
2874 @end defmac
2875
2876 @defmac TARGET_USES_WEAK_UNWIND_INFO
2877 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target requires unwind
2878 info to be given comdat linkage. Define it to be @code{1} if comdat
2879 linkage is necessary. The default is @code{0}.
2880 @end defmac
2881
2882 @node Stack Checking
2883 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2884
2885 GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of the
2886 stack, if the option @option{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of
2887 three ways:
2888
2889 @enumerate
2890 @item
2891 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
2892 will assume that you have arranged for full stack checking to be done
2893 at appropriate places in the configuration files. GCC will not do
2894 other special processing.
2895
2896 @item
2897 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and the value of the
2898 @code{STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC will assume
2899 that you have arranged for static stack checking (checking of the
2900 static stack frame of functions) to be done at appropriate places
2901 in the configuration files. GCC will only emit code to do dynamic
2902 stack checking (checking on dynamic stack allocations) using the third
2903 approach below.
2904
2905 @item
2906 If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
2907 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2908 @end enumerate
2909
2910 If neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined,
2911 GCC will change its allocation strategy for large objects if the option
2912 @option{-fstack-check} is specified: they will always be allocated
2913 dynamically if their size exceeds @code{STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE} bytes.
2914
2915 @defmac STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2916 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2917 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2918 is required by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to do stack
2919 checking in some more efficient way than the generic approach. The default
2920 value of this macro is zero.
2921 @end defmac
2922
2923 @defmac STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN
2924 A nonzero value if static stack checking is done by the configuration files
2925 in a machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if you would
2926 like to do static stack checking in some more efficient way than the generic
2927 approach. The default value of this macro is zero.
2928 @end defmac
2929
2930 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL_EXP
2931 An integer specifying the interval at which GCC must generate stack probe
2932 instructions, defined as 2 raised to this integer. You will normally
2933 define this macro so that the interval be no larger than the size of
2934 the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The default value
2935 of 12 (4096-byte interval) is suitable for most systems.
2936 @end defmac
2937
2938 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MOVING_SP
2939 An integer which is nonzero if GCC should move the stack pointer page by page
2940 when doing probes. This can be necessary on systems where the stack pointer
2941 contains the bottom address of the memory area accessible to the executing
2942 thread at any point in time. In this situation an alternate signal stack
2943 is required in order to be able to recover from a stack overflow. The
2944 default value of this macro is zero.
2945 @end defmac
2946
2947 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2948 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow, for
2949 languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of 4KB/8KB
2950 with the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism and
2951 8KB/12KB with other exception handling mechanisms should be adequate for most
2952 architectures and operating systems.
2953 @end defmac
2954
2955 The following macros are relevant only if neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2956 nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined; you can omit them altogether
2957 in the opposite case.
2958
2959 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2960 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GCC will generate probe
2961 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2962 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2963 checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning. The
2964 default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
2965 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2966 @end defmac
2967
2968 @defmac STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2969 GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2970 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2971 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2972 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2973 use the default of four words.
2974 @end defmac
2975
2976 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2977 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
2978 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2979 @option{-fstack-check}.
2980 GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2981 normally not need to override that default.
2982 @end defmac
2983
2984 @need 2000
2985 @node Frame Registers
2986 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
2987
2988 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2989 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
2990
2991 @defmac STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2992 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
2993 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
2994 the hardware determines which register this is.
2995 @end defmac
2996
2997 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2998 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
2999 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
3000 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
3001 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
3002 @end defmac
3003
3004 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3005 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
3006 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
3007 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
3008 between these two locations). On those machines, define
3009 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
3010 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
3011 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
3012 used for the frame pointer.
3013
3014 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
3015 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
3016 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
3017 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
3018 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
3019 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
3020 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
3021
3022 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
3023 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
3024 @end defmac
3025
3026 @defmac ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
3027 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
3028 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
3029 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
3030 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
3031 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
3032 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
3033 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
3034 (@pxref{Elimination}).
3035 @end defmac
3036
3037 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
3038 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
3039 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{frame_pointer_rtx} should be
3040 the same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3041 == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
3042 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
3043 @end defmac
3044
3045 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_ARG_POINTER
3046 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
3047 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{arg_pointer_rtx} should be the
3048 same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM ==
3049 ARG_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
3050 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
3051 @end defmac
3052
3053 @defmac RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
3054 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
3055 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
3056 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
3057 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
3058 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
3059 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
3060
3061 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
3062 address from the stack.
3063 @end defmac
3064
3065 @defmac STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
3066 @defmacx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
3067 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
3068 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
3069 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
3070 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
3071 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
3072 not be defined.
3073
3074 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
3075
3076 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
3077 defined; instead, the @code{TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN} hook should be used.
3078 @end defmac
3079
3080 @hook TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN
3081
3082 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
3083 This macro specifies the maximum number of hard registers that can be
3084 saved in a call frame. This is used to size data structures used in
3085 DWARF2 exception handling.
3086
3087 Prior to GCC 3.0, this macro was needed in order to establish a stable
3088 exception handling ABI in the face of adding new hard registers for ISA
3089 extensions. In GCC 3.0 and later, the EH ABI is insulated from changes
3090 in the number of hard registers. Nevertheless, this macro can still be
3091 used to reduce the runtime memory requirements of the exception handling
3092 routines, which can be substantial if the ISA contains a lot of
3093 registers that are not call-saved.
3094
3095 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
3096 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
3097 @end defmac
3098
3099 @defmac PRE_GCC3_DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
3100
3101 This macro is similar to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}, but is provided
3102 for backward compatibility in pre GCC 3.0 compiled code.
3103
3104 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
3105 @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}.
3106 @end defmac
3107
3108 @defmac DWARF_REG_TO_UNWIND_COLUMN (@var{regno})
3109
3110 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3111 is different than the internal representation for unwind column.
3112 Given a dwarf register, this macro should return the internal unwind
3113 column number to use instead.
3114
3115 See the PowerPC's SPE target for an example.
3116 @end defmac
3117
3118 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (@var{regno})
3119
3120 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3121 used in .eh_frame or .debug_frame is different from that used in other
3122 debug info sections. Given a GCC hard register number, this macro
3123 should return the .eh_frame register number. The default is
3124 @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})}.
3125
3126 @end defmac
3127
3128 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_REG_OUT (@var{regno}, @var{for_eh})
3129
3130 Define this macro to map register numbers held in the call frame info
3131 that GCC has collected using @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM} to those that
3132 should be output in .debug_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is zero) and
3133 .eh_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is nonzero). The default is to
3134 return @code{@var{regno}}.
3135
3136 @end defmac
3137
3138 @defmac REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3139
3140 Define this macro if the target stores register values as
3141 @code{_Unwind_Word} type in unwind context. It should be defined if
3142 target register size is larger than the size of @code{void *}. The
3143 default is to store register values as @code{void *} type.
3144
3145 @end defmac
3146
3147 @defmac ASSUME_EXTENDED_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3148
3149 Define this macro to be 1 if the target always uses extended unwind
3150 context with version, args_size and by_value fields. If it is undefined,
3151 it will be defined to 1 when @code{REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT} is
3152 defined and 0 otherwise.
3153
3154 @end defmac
3155
3156 @node Elimination
3157 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
3158
3159 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3160 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
3161
3162 @hook TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
3163
3164 @findex get_frame_size
3165 @defmac INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET (@var{depth-var})
3166 A C statement to store in the variable @var{depth-var} the difference
3167 between the frame pointer and the stack pointer values immediately after
3168 the function prologue. The value would be computed from information
3169 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
3170 registers @code{regs_ever_live} and @code{call_used_regs}.
3171
3172 If @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is defined, this macro will be not be used and
3173 need not be defined. Otherwise, it must be defined even if
3174 @code{TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} always returns true; in that
3175 case, you may set @var{depth-var} to anything.
3176 @end defmac
3177
3178 @defmac ELIMINABLE_REGS
3179 If defined, this macro specifies a table of register pairs used to
3180 eliminate unneeded registers that point into the stack frame. If it is not
3181 defined, the only elimination attempted by the compiler is to replace
3182 references to the frame pointer with references to the stack pointer.
3183
3184 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
3185 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
3186
3187 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
3188 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
3189 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
3190 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
3191 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
3192
3193 In this case, you might specify:
3194 @smallexample
3195 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
3196 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3197 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3198 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
3199 @end smallexample
3200
3201 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
3202 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
3203 @end defmac
3204
3205 @hook TARGET_CAN_ELIMINATE
3206
3207 @defmac INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
3208 This macro is similar to @code{INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET}. It
3209 specifies the initial difference between the specified pair of
3210 registers. This macro must be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is
3211 defined.
3212 @end defmac
3213
3214 @node Stack Arguments
3215 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
3216 @cindex arguments on stack
3217 @cindex stack arguments
3218
3219 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
3220 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
3221 control passing certain arguments in registers.
3222
3223 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
3224
3225 @defmac PUSH_ARGS
3226 A C expression. If nonzero, push insns will be used to pass
3227 outgoing arguments.
3228 If the target machine does not have a push instruction, set it to zero.
3229 That directs GCC to use an alternate strategy: to
3230 allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
3231 it. When @code{PUSH_ARGS} is nonzero, @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} must be defined too.
3232 @end defmac
3233
3234 @defmac PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
3235 A C expression. If nonzero, function arguments will be evaluated from
3236 last to first, rather than from first to last. If this macro is not
3237 defined, it defaults to @code{PUSH_ARGS} on targets where the stack
3238 and args grow in opposite directions, and 0 otherwise.
3239 @end defmac
3240
3241 @defmac PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
3242 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
3243 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
3244
3245 On some machines, the definition
3246
3247 @smallexample
3248 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
3249 @end smallexample
3250
3251 @noindent
3252 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
3253 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
3254 alignment. Then the definition should be
3255
3256 @smallexample
3257 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
3258 @end smallexample
3259
3260 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
3261 @end defmac
3262
3263 @findex outgoing_args_size
3264 @findex crtl->outgoing_args_size
3265 @defmac ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
3266 A C expression. If nonzero, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
3267 will be computed and placed into
3268 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
3269 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
3270 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
3271
3272 Setting both @code{PUSH_ARGS} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
3273 is not proper.
3274 @end defmac
3275
3276 @defmac REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3277 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
3278 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
3279 registers.
3280
3281 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
3282 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
3283 which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
3284 The argument @var{fndecl} can be the FUNCTION_DECL, or the type itself
3285 of the function.
3286
3287 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
3288 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
3289 which.
3290 @end defmac
3291 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
3292 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
3293
3294 @defmac INCOMING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3295 Like @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, but for incoming register arguments.
3296 Define this macro if space guaranteed when compiling a function body
3297 is different to space required when making a call, a situation that
3298 can arise with K&R style function definitions.
3299 @end defmac
3300
3301 @defmac OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fntype})
3302 Define this to a nonzero value if it is the responsibility of the
3303 caller to allocate the area reserved for arguments passed in registers
3304 when calling a function of @var{fntype}. @var{fntype} may be NULL
3305 if the function called is a library function.
3306
3307 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
3308 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
3309 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}.
3310 @end defmac
3311
3312 @defmac STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
3313 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
3314 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
3315 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
3316 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
3317
3318 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
3319 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
3320 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
3321 stack in its natural location.
3322 @end defmac
3323
3324 @hook TARGET_RETURN_POPS_ARGS
3325
3326 @defmac CALL_POPS_ARGS (@var{cum})
3327 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes a call sequence
3328 pops off the stack. It is added to the value of @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS}
3329 when compiling a function call.
3330
3331 @var{cum} is the variable in which all arguments to the called function
3332 have been accumulated.
3333
3334 On certain architectures, such as the SH5, a call trampoline is used
3335 that pops certain registers off the stack, depending on the arguments
3336 that have been passed to the function. Since this is a property of the
3337 call site, not of the called function, @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is not
3338 appropriate.
3339 @end defmac
3340
3341 @node Register Arguments
3342 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
3343 @cindex arguments in registers
3344 @cindex registers arguments
3345
3346 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
3347 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
3348 the stack.
3349
3350 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG
3351
3352 @hook TARGET_MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
3353
3354 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
3355
3356 @hook TARGET_USE_PSEUDO_PIC_REG
3357
3358 @hook TARGET_INIT_PIC_REG
3359
3360 @hook TARGET_ARG_PARTIAL_BYTES
3361
3362 @hook TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
3363
3364 @hook TARGET_CALLEE_COPIES
3365
3366 @defmac CUMULATIVE_ARGS
3367 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument
3368 of @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some
3369 target machines, the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number
3370 of bytes of argument so far.
3371
3372 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
3373 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
3374 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
3375 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
3376 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
3377 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
3378 @end defmac
3379
3380 @defmac OVERRIDE_ABI_FORMAT (@var{fndecl})
3381 If defined, this macro is called before generating any code for a
3382 function, but after the @var{cfun} descriptor for the function has been
3383 created. The back end may use this macro to update @var{cfun} to
3384 reflect an ABI other than that which would normally be used by default.
3385 If the compiler is generating code for a compiler-generated function,
3386 @var{fndecl} may be @code{NULL}.
3387 @end defmac
3388
3389 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{fndecl}, @var{n_named_args})
3390 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable
3391 @var{cum} for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The
3392 variable has type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype}
3393 is the tree node for the data type of the function which will receive
3394 the args, or 0 if the args are to a compiler support library function.
3395 For direct calls that are not libcalls, @var{fndecl} contain the
3396 declaration node of the function. @var{fndecl} is also set when
3397 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
3398 being compiled. @var{n_named_args} is set to the number of named
3399 arguments, including a structure return address if it is passed as a
3400 parameter, when making a call. When processing incoming arguments,
3401 @var{n_named_args} is set to @minus{}1.
3402
3403 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
3404 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
3405 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
3406 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
3407 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
3408 never both of them at once.
3409 @end defmac
3410
3411 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_LIBCALL_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{libname})
3412 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but only used for outgoing libcalls,
3413 it gets a @code{MODE} argument instead of @var{fntype}, that would be
3414 @code{NULL}. @var{indirect} would always be zero, too. If this macro
3415 is not defined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (cum, NULL_RTX, libname,
3416 0)} is used instead.
3417 @end defmac
3418
3419 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
3420 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
3421 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
3422 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
3423
3424 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
3425 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC@. The
3426 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
3427 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
3428 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
3429 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
3430 @end defmac
3431
3432 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
3433
3434 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_OFFSET (@var{mode}, @var{type})
3435 If defined, a C expression that is the number of bytes to add to the
3436 offset of the argument passed in memory. This is needed for the SPU,
3437 which passes @code{char} and @code{short} arguments in the preferred
3438 slot that is in the middle of the quad word instead of starting at the
3439 top.
3440 @end defmac
3441
3442 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type})
3443 If defined, a C expression which determines whether, and in which direction,
3444 to pad out an argument with extra space. The value should be of type
3445 @code{enum direction}: either @code{upward} to pad above the argument,
3446 @code{downward} to pad below, or @code{none} to inhibit padding.
3447
3448 The @emph{amount} of padding is not controlled by this macro, but by the
3449 target hook @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY}. It is
3450 always just enough to reach the next multiple of that boundary.
3451
3452 This macro has a default definition which is right for most systems.
3453 For little-endian machines, the default is to pad upward. For
3454 big-endian machines, the default is to pad downward for an argument of
3455 constant size shorter than an @code{int}, and upward otherwise.
3456 @end defmac
3457
3458 @defmac PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
3459 If defined, a C expression which determines whether the default
3460 implementation of va_arg will attempt to pad down before reading the
3461 next argument, if that argument is smaller than its aligned space as
3462 controlled by @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}. If this macro is not defined, all such
3463 arguments are padded down if @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN} is true.
3464 @end defmac
3465
3466 @defmac BLOCK_REG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{first})
3467 Specify padding for the last element of a block move between registers and
3468 memory. @var{first} is nonzero if this is the only element. Defining this
3469 macro allows better control of register function parameters on big-endian
3470 machines, without using @code{PARALLEL} rtl. In particular,
3471 @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK} need not test padding and mode of types in
3472 registers, as there is no longer a "wrong" part of a register; For example,
3473 a three byte aggregate may be passed in the high part of a register if so
3474 required.
3475 @end defmac
3476
3477 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
3478
3479 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY
3480
3481 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3482 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3483 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
3484 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
3485 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
3486 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
3487 stack.
3488 @end defmac
3489
3490 @hook TARGET_SPLIT_COMPLEX_ARG
3491
3492 @hook TARGET_BUILD_BUILTIN_VA_LIST
3493
3494 @hook TARGET_ENUM_VA_LIST_P
3495
3496 @hook TARGET_FN_ABI_VA_LIST
3497
3498 @hook TARGET_CANONICAL_VA_LIST_TYPE
3499
3500 @hook TARGET_GIMPLIFY_VA_ARG_EXPR
3501
3502 @hook TARGET_VALID_POINTER_MODE
3503
3504 @hook TARGET_REF_MAY_ALIAS_ERRNO
3505
3506 @hook TARGET_SCALAR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3507
3508 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3509
3510 @hook TARGET_ARRAY_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3511
3512 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_FLOATING_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3513
3514 @hook TARGET_SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES_FOR_MODE_P
3515
3516 @node Scalar Return
3517 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
3518 @cindex return values in registers
3519 @cindex values, returned by functions
3520 @cindex scalars, returned as values
3521
3522 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
3523 values---values that can fit in registers.
3524
3525 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE
3526
3527 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3528 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} for
3529 a new target instead.
3530 @end defmac
3531
3532 @defmac LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3533 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3534 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}.
3535
3536 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3537 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3538 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3539 compiled.
3540 @end defmac
3541
3542 @hook TARGET_LIBCALL_VALUE
3543
3544 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3545 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3546 register in which the values of called function may come back.
3547
3548 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3549 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3550 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3551 suffices:
3552
3553 @smallexample
3554 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3555 @end smallexample
3556
3557 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3558 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3559 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3560
3561 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P}
3562 for a new target instead.
3563 @end defmac
3564
3565 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3566
3567 @defmac APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3568 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3569 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3570 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3571 @end defmac
3572
3573 @hook TARGET_OMIT_STRUCT_RETURN_REG
3574
3575 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MSB
3576
3577 @node Aggregate Return
3578 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3579 @cindex aggregates as return values
3580 @cindex large return values
3581 @cindex returning aggregate values
3582 @cindex structure value address
3583
3584 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3585 cases), the value is not returned according to
3586 @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the
3587 caller passes the address of a block of memory in which the value
3588 should be stored. This address is called the @dfn{structure value
3589 address}.
3590
3591 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3592 memory.
3593
3594 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3595
3596 @defmac DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3597 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3598 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3599 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI@.
3600 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3601 and union return values are decided by the @code{TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY}
3602 target hook.
3603
3604 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3605 @end defmac
3606
3607 @hook TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX
3608
3609 @defmac PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3610 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3611 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3612 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3613
3614 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3615 pass an address to the subroutine.
3616
3617 This macro has effect in @option{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3618 nothing when you use @option{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3619 @end defmac
3620
3621 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_RESULT_MODE
3622
3623 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_ARG_MODE
3624
3625 @node Caller Saves
3626 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3627
3628 If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls. This
3629 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3630 must live across calls.
3631
3632 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
3633 A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
3634 of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}. If
3635 @var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
3636 returned. For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
3637 will select the smallest suitable mode.
3638 @end defmac
3639
3640 @node Function Entry
3641 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3642 @cindex function entry and exit
3643 @cindex prologue
3644 @cindex epilogue
3645
3646 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3647 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3648
3649 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3650
3651 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_END_PROLOGUE
3652
3653 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_BEGIN_EPILOGUE
3654
3655 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3656
3657 @itemize @bullet
3658 @item
3659 @findex pretend_args_size
3660 @findex crtl->args.pretend_args_size
3661 A region of @code{crtl->args.pretend_args_size} bytes of
3662 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3663 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3664 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3665 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3666 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3667 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3668 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3669 features in @code{<stdarg.h>}.
3670
3671 @item
3672 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3673 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3674 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3675 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3676 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3677 a save area.
3678
3679 @item
3680 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3681 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3682 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3683 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3684
3685 @item
3686 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3687 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3688 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3689 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3690 @end itemize
3691
3692 @defmac EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3693 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3694 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3695 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3696 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function. The
3697 default is 0.
3698
3699 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3700 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3701 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3702 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3703 @end defmac
3704
3705 @defmac EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3706 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3707 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3708 pointer registers are already assumed to be used as needed.
3709 @end defmac
3710
3711 @defmac EH_USES (@var{regno})
3712 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3713 used by the exception handling mechanism, and so should be considered live
3714 on entry to an exception edge.
3715 @end defmac
3716
3717 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3718
3719 @hook TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3720
3721 @node Profiling
3722 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3723 @cindex profiling, code generation
3724
3725 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3726
3727 @defmac FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3728 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3729 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3730
3731 @findex mcount
3732 The details of how @code{mcount} expects to be called are determined by
3733 your operating system environment, not by GCC@. To figure them out,
3734 compile a small program for profiling using the system's installed C
3735 compiler and look at the assembler code that results.
3736
3737 Older implementations of @code{mcount} expect the address of a counter
3738 variable to be loaded into some register. The name of this variable is
3739 @samp{LP} followed by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate
3740 the name using @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3741 @end defmac
3742
3743 @defmac PROFILE_HOOK
3744 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some assembly
3745 code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount} even the target does
3746 not support profiling.
3747 @end defmac
3748
3749 @defmac NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS
3750 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if the
3751 @code{mcount} subroutine on your system does not need a counter variable
3752 allocated for each function. This is true for almost all modern
3753 implementations. If you define this macro, you must not use the
3754 @var{labelno} argument to @code{FUNCTION_PROFILER}.
3755 @end defmac
3756
3757 @defmac PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3758 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3759 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3760 @end defmac
3761
3762 @hook TARGET_KEEP_LEAF_WHEN_PROFILED
3763
3764 @node Tail Calls
3765 @subsection Permitting tail calls
3766 @cindex tail calls
3767
3768 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
3769
3770 @hook TARGET_EXTRA_LIVE_ON_ENTRY
3771
3772 @hook TARGET_SET_UP_BY_PROLOGUE
3773
3774 @hook TARGET_WARN_FUNC_RETURN
3775
3776 @node Stack Smashing Protection
3777 @subsection Stack smashing protection
3778 @cindex stack smashing protection
3779
3780 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_GUARD
3781
3782 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_FAIL
3783
3784 @hook TARGET_SUPPORTS_SPLIT_STACK
3785
3786 @node Miscellaneous Register Hooks
3787 @subsection Miscellaneous register hooks
3788 @cindex miscellaneous register hooks
3789
3790 @hook TARGET_CALL_FUSAGE_CONTAINS_NON_CALLEE_CLOBBERS
3791
3792 @node Varargs
3793 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3794 @cindex varargs implementation
3795
3796 GCC comes with an implementation of @code{<varargs.h>} and
3797 @code{<stdarg.h>} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3798 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3799 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3800 conditionals to include it.
3801
3802 ISO @code{<stdarg.h>} differs from traditional @code{<varargs.h>} mainly in
3803 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3804 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3805 to store the argument pointer. The ISO implementation of
3806 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3807 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3808
3809 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3810 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3811 below.
3812
3813 @defmac __builtin_saveregs ()
3814 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3815 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ISO and traditional
3816 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3817 you use @code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3818
3819 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3820 control of the target hook @code{TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On
3821 other machines, it calls a routine written in assembler language,
3822 found in @file{libgcc2.c}.
3823
3824 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3825 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3826 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3827 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3828 to use them for its own purposes.
3829 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3830 @c 10feb93
3831 @end defmac
3832
3833 @defmac __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3834 This builtin returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3835 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3836 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3837 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3838 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3839 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3840 of the current function.
3841 @end defmac
3842
3843 @defmac __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3844 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3845 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3846 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3847 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3848 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3849
3850 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3851 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3852 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3853
3854 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3855 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3856 @end defmac
3857
3858 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3859
3860 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3861
3862 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3863
3864 @hook TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3865
3866 @hook TARGET_CALL_ARGS
3867
3868 @hook TARGET_END_CALL_ARGS
3869
3870 @hook TARGET_PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3871
3872 @hook TARGET_LOAD_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3873
3874 @hook TARGET_STORE_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3875
3876 @hook TARGET_LOAD_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3877
3878 @hook TARGET_STORE_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3879
3880 @hook TARGET_CHKP_FUNCTION_VALUE_BOUNDS
3881
3882 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARG_BOUNDS
3883
3884 @node Trampolines
3885 @section Trampolines for Nested Functions
3886 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3887 @cindex nested functions, trampolines for
3888
3889 A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
3890 when the address of a nested function is taken. It normally resides on
3891 the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function. These macros
3892 tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
3893 trampoline.
3894
3895 The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
3896 address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
3897 the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
3898 two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the two addresses
3899 exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands. On RISC
3900 machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
3901 two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
3902 operands.
3903
3904 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3905 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3906 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3907 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3908 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3909 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3910 separately.
3911
3912 @hook TARGET_ASM_TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3913
3914 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3915 Return the section into which the trampoline template is to be placed
3916 (@pxref{Sections}). The default value is @code{readonly_data_section}.
3917 @end defmac
3918
3919 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3920 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3921 @end defmac
3922
3923 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3924 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3925
3926 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{FUNCTION_ALIGNMENT}
3927 is used for aligning trampolines.
3928 @end defmac
3929
3930 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_INIT
3931
3932 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_ADJUST_ADDRESS
3933
3934 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3935 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3936 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3937 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3938
3939 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3940 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3941 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3942 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3943 latter makes initialization faster.
3944
3945 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3946 the following macro.
3947
3948 @defmac CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{beg}, @var{end})
3949 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3950 cache} in the specified interval. The definition of this macro would
3951 typically be a series of @code{asm} statements. Both @var{beg} and
3952 @var{end} are both pointer expressions.
3953 @end defmac
3954
3955 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
3956 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
3957 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
3958 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
3959 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
3960
3961 @defmac TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3962 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
3963 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
3964 which will be compiled with GCC@. They go in a library function named
3965 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
3966
3967 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
3968 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
3969 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
3970 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
3971 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
3972 special assembler code.
3973 @end defmac
3974
3975 @node Library Calls
3976 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
3977 @cindex library subroutine names
3978 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
3979
3980 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3981 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
3982
3983 @defmac DECLARE_LIBRARY_RENAMES
3984 This macro, if defined, should expand to a piece of C code that will get
3985 expanded when compiling functions for libgcc.a. It can be used to
3986 provide alternate names for GCC's internal library functions if there
3987 are ABI-mandated names that the compiler should provide.
3988 @end defmac
3989
3990 @findex set_optab_libfunc
3991 @findex init_one_libfunc
3992 @hook TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS
3993
3994 @hook TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX
3995
3996 @defmac FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
3997 This macro should return @code{true} if the library routine that
3998 implements the floating point comparison operator @var{comparison} in
3999 mode @var{mode} will return a boolean, and @var{false} if it will
4000 return a tristate.
4001
4002 GCC's own floating point libraries return tristates from the
4003 comparison operators, so the default returns false always. Most ports
4004 don't need to define this macro.
4005 @end defmac
4006
4007 @defmac TARGET_LIB_INT_CMP_BIASED
4008 This macro should evaluate to @code{true} if the integer comparison
4009 functions (like @code{__cmpdi2}) return 0 to indicate that the first
4010 operand is smaller than the second, 1 to indicate that they are equal,
4011 and 2 to indicate that the first operand is greater than the second.
4012 If this macro evaluates to @code{false} the comparison functions return
4013 @minus{}1, 0, and 1 instead of 0, 1, and 2. If the target uses the routines
4014 in @file{libgcc.a}, you do not need to define this macro.
4015 @end defmac
4016
4017 @defmac TARGET_HAS_NO_HW_DIVIDE
4018 This macro should be defined if the target has no hardware divide
4019 instructions. If this macro is defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
4020 make use of simple logical and arithmetic operations for 64-bit
4021 division. If the macro is not defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
4022 make use of a 64-bit by 32-bit divide primitive.
4023 @end defmac
4024
4025 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
4026 @findex matherr
4027 @defmac TARGET_EDOM
4028 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
4029 expression. If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
4030 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
4031 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
4032 system.
4033
4034 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
4035 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
4036 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
4037 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
4038 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
4039 @end defmac
4040
4041 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
4042 @defmac GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4043 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
4044 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
4045 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
4046 macro, a reasonable default is used.
4047 @end defmac
4048
4049 @hook TARGET_LIBC_HAS_FUNCTION
4050
4051 @defmac NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4052 Set this macro to 1 to use the "NeXT" Objective-C message sending conventions
4053 by default. This calling convention involves passing the object, the selector
4054 and the method arguments all at once to the method-lookup library function.
4055 This is the usual setting when targeting Darwin/Mac OS X systems, which have
4056 the NeXT runtime installed.
4057
4058 If the macro is set to 0, the "GNU" Objective-C message sending convention
4059 will be used by default. This convention passes just the object and the
4060 selector to the method-lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
4061
4062 In either case, it remains possible to select code-generation for the alternate
4063 scheme, by means of compiler command line switches.
4064 @end defmac
4065
4066 @node Addressing Modes
4067 @section Addressing Modes
4068 @cindex addressing modes
4069
4070 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4071 This is about addressing modes.
4072
4073 @defmac HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4074 @defmacx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4075 @defmacx HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4076 @defmacx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4077 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre-increment,
4078 pre-decrement, post-increment, or post-decrement addressing respectively.
4079 @end defmac
4080
4081 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_DISP
4082 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_DISP
4083 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4084 post-address side-effect generation involving constants other than
4085 the size of the memory operand.
4086 @end defmac
4087
4088 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_REG
4089 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_REG
4090 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4091 post-address side-effect generation involving a register displacement.
4092 @end defmac
4093
4094 @defmac CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4095 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4096 is a valid address. On most machines the default definition of
4097 @code{(CONSTANT_P (@var{x}) && GET_CODE (@var{x}) != CONST_DOUBLE)}
4098 is acceptable, but a few machines are more restrictive as to which
4099 constant addresses are supported.
4100 @end defmac
4101
4102 @defmac CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4103 @code{CONSTANT_P}, which is defined by target-independent code,
4104 accepts integer-values expressions whose values are not explicitly
4105 known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and @code{high}
4106 expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in addition to
4107 @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4108 @end defmac
4109
4110 @defmac MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4111 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4112 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4113 the maximum number that @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} would ever
4114 accept.
4115 @end defmac
4116
4117 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
4118
4119 @defmac TARGET_MEM_CONSTRAINT
4120 A single character to be used instead of the default @code{'m'}
4121 character for general memory addresses. This defines the constraint
4122 letter which matches the memory addresses accepted by
4123 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P}. Define this macro if you want to
4124 support new address formats in your back end without changing the
4125 semantics of the @code{'m'} constraint. This is necessary in order to
4126 preserve functionality of inline assembly constructs using the
4127 @code{'m'} constraint.
4128 @end defmac
4129
4130 @defmac FIND_BASE_TERM (@var{x})
4131 A C expression to determine the base term of address @var{x},
4132 or to provide a simplified version of @var{x} from which @file{alias.c}
4133 can easily find the base term. This macro is used in only two places:
4134 @code{find_base_value} and @code{find_base_term} in @file{alias.c}.
4135
4136 It is always safe for this macro to not be defined. It exists so
4137 that alias analysis can understand machine-dependent addresses.
4138
4139 The typical use of this macro is to handle addresses containing
4140 a label_ref or symbol_ref within an UNSPEC@.
4141 @end defmac
4142
4143 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4144
4145 @defmac LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4146 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4147 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4148 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4149 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4150 performance reasons.
4151
4152 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4153 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4154 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4155 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4156 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4157 @code{LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS} appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4158 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4159 be shared.
4160
4161 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4162 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4163 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4164 of reload internals.
4165
4166 @emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4167 previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4168 then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4169
4170 @findex push_reload
4171 The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4172 need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4173 suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
4174
4175 The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
4176 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4177 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4178 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4179 @code{push_reload}.
4180
4181 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4182 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4183 the address has become legitimate.
4184
4185 @findex copy_rtx
4186 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4187 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that it unshares only a
4188 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4189 top level, you'll need to replace first the top level.
4190 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4191 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4192 @end defmac
4193
4194 @hook TARGET_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS_P
4195
4196 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4197
4198 @hook TARGET_DELEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4199
4200 @hook TARGET_CONST_NOT_OK_FOR_DEBUG_P
4201
4202 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM
4203
4204 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_CONSTANT_P
4205
4206 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_DECL_P
4207
4208 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_RECIPROCAL
4209
4210 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MASK_FOR_LOAD
4211
4212 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZATION_COST
4213
4214 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT_REACHABLE
4215
4216 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VEC_PERM_CONST_OK
4217
4218 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_CONVERSION
4219
4220 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4221
4222 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_SUPPORT_VECTOR_MISALIGNMENT
4223
4224 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_SIMD_MODE
4225
4226 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_AUTOVECTORIZE_VECTOR_SIZES
4227
4228 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_INIT_COST
4229
4230 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_ADD_STMT_COST
4231
4232 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_FINISH_COST
4233
4234 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_DESTROY_COST_DATA
4235
4236 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_TM_LOAD
4237
4238 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_TM_STORE
4239
4240 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_GATHER
4241
4242 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_SCATTER
4243
4244 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_COMPUTE_VECSIZE_AND_SIMDLEN
4245
4246 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_ADJUST
4247
4248 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_USABLE
4249
4250 @node Anchored Addresses
4251 @section Anchored Addresses
4252 @cindex anchored addresses
4253 @cindex @option{-fsection-anchors}
4254
4255 GCC usually addresses every static object as a separate entity.
4256 For example, if we have:
4257
4258 @smallexample
4259 static int a, b, c;
4260 int foo (void) @{ return a + b + c; @}
4261 @end smallexample
4262
4263 the code for @code{foo} will usually calculate three separate symbolic
4264 addresses: those of @code{a}, @code{b} and @code{c}. On some targets,
4265 it would be better to calculate just one symbolic address and access
4266 the three variables relative to it. The equivalent pseudocode would
4267 be something like:
4268
4269 @smallexample
4270 int foo (void)
4271 @{
4272 register int *xr = &x;
4273 return xr[&a - &x] + xr[&b - &x] + xr[&c - &x];
4274 @}
4275 @end smallexample
4276
4277 (which isn't valid C). We refer to shared addresses like @code{x} as
4278 ``section anchors''. Their use is controlled by @option{-fsection-anchors}.
4279
4280 The hooks below describe the target properties that GCC needs to know
4281 in order to make effective use of section anchors. It won't use
4282 section anchors at all unless either @code{TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET}
4283 or @code{TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET} is set to a nonzero value.
4284
4285 @hook TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4286
4287 @hook TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4288
4289 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ANCHOR
4290
4291 @hook TARGET_USE_ANCHORS_FOR_SYMBOL_P
4292
4293 @node Condition Code
4294 @section Condition Code Status
4295 @cindex condition code status
4296
4297 The macros in this section can be split in two families, according to the
4298 two ways of representing condition codes in GCC.
4299
4300 The first representation is the so called @code{(cc0)} representation
4301 (@pxref{Jump Patterns}), where all instructions can have an implicit
4302 clobber of the condition codes. The second is the condition code
4303 register representation, which provides better schedulability for
4304 architectures that do have a condition code register, but on which
4305 most instructions do not affect it. The latter category includes
4306 most RISC machines.
4307
4308 The implicit clobbering poses a strong restriction on the placement of
4309 the definition and use of the condition code. In the past the definition
4310 and use were always adjacent. However, recent changes to support trapping
4311 arithmatic may result in the definition and user being in different blocks.
4312 Thus, there may be a @code{NOTE_INSN_BASIC_BLOCK} between them. Additionally,
4313 the definition may be the source of exception handling edges.
4314
4315 These restrictions can prevent important
4316 optimizations on some machines. For example, on the IBM RS/6000, there
4317 is a delay for taken branches unless the condition code register is set
4318 three instructions earlier than the conditional branch. The instruction
4319 scheduler cannot perform this optimization if it is not permitted to
4320 separate the definition and use of the condition code register.
4321
4322 For this reason, it is possible and suggested to use a register to
4323 represent the condition code for new ports. If there is a specific
4324 condition code register in the machine, use a hard register. If the
4325 condition code or comparison result can be placed in any general register,
4326 or if there are multiple condition registers, use a pseudo register.
4327 Registers used to store the condition code value will usually have a mode
4328 that is in class @code{MODE_CC}.
4329
4330 Alternatively, you can use @code{BImode} if the comparison operator is
4331 specified already in the compare instruction. In this case, you are not
4332 interested in most macros in this section.
4333
4334 @menu
4335 * CC0 Condition Codes:: Old style representation of condition codes.
4336 * MODE_CC Condition Codes:: Modern representation of condition codes.
4337 @end menu
4338
4339 @node CC0 Condition Codes
4340 @subsection Representation of condition codes using @code{(cc0)}
4341 @findex cc0
4342
4343 @findex cc_status
4344 The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4345 describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4346 the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4347 variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4348 currently based, and several standard flags.
4349
4350 Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4351 description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4352 information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4353
4354 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP
4355 C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4356 component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4357
4358 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4359 @end defmac
4360
4361 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4362 A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4363 The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4364 the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4365 define this macro to initialize it.
4366
4367 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4368 @end defmac
4369
4370 @defmac NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4371 A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4372 appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4373 this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4374 code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4375 set @code{(cc0)}.
4376
4377 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4378
4379 If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4380 other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4381 invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4382 reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4383 registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4384 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4385 insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4386 based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4387 value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4388 this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4389 @samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4390 @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4391 condition code value.
4392
4393 The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4394 with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4395 @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4396 constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4397 insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4398 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4399 @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4400
4401 A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4402 that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4403 @samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4404 two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4405 @end defmac
4406
4407 @node MODE_CC Condition Codes
4408 @subsection Representation of condition codes using registers
4409 @findex CCmode
4410 @findex MODE_CC
4411
4412 @defmac SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4413 On many machines, the condition code may be produced by other instructions
4414 than compares, for example the branch can use directly the condition
4415 code set by a subtract instruction. However, on some machines
4416 when the condition code is set this way some bits (such as the overflow
4417 bit) are not set in the same way as a test instruction, so that a different
4418 branch instruction must be used for some conditional branches. When
4419 this happens, use the machine mode of the condition code register to
4420 record different formats of the condition code register. Modes can
4421 also be used to record which compare instruction (e.g. a signed or an
4422 unsigned comparison) produced the condition codes.
4423
4424 If other modes than @code{CCmode} are required, add them to
4425 @file{@var{machine}-modes.def} and define @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} to choose
4426 a mode given an operand of a compare. This is needed because the modes
4427 have to be chosen not only during RTL generation but also, for example,
4428 by instruction combination. The result of @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} should
4429 be consistent with the mode used in the patterns; for example to support
4430 the case of the add on the SPARC discussed above, we have the pattern
4431
4432 @smallexample
4433 (define_insn ""
4434 [(set (reg:CC_NOOV 0)
4435 (compare:CC_NOOV
4436 (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "%r")
4437 (match_operand:SI 1 "arith_operand" "rI"))
4438 (const_int 0)))]
4439 ""
4440 "@dots{}")
4441 @end smallexample
4442
4443 @noindent
4444 together with a @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} that returns @code{CC_NOOVmode}
4445 for comparisons whose argument is a @code{plus}:
4446
4447 @smallexample
4448 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4449 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4450 ? ((OP == LT || OP == LE || OP == GT || OP == GE) \
4451 ? CCFPEmode : CCFPmode) \
4452 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4453 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFT) \
4454 ? CC_NOOVmode : CCmode))
4455 @end smallexample
4456
4457 Another reason to use modes is to retain information on which operands
4458 were used by the comparison; see @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE} later in
4459 this section.
4460
4461 You should define this macro if and only if you define extra CC modes
4462 in @file{@var{machine}-modes.def}.
4463 @end defmac
4464
4465 @hook TARGET_CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4466
4467 @defmac REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4468 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4469 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4470 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4471 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4472
4473 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4474 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4475 For example, here is the definition used on the SPARC, where floating-point
4476 inequality comparisons are given either @code{CCFPEmode} or @code{CCFPmode}:
4477
4478 @smallexample
4479 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) \
4480 ((MODE) != CCFPEmode && (MODE) != CCFPmode)
4481 @end smallexample
4482 @end defmac
4483
4484 @defmac REVERSE_CONDITION (@var{code}, @var{mode})
4485 A C expression whose value is reversed condition code of the @var{code} for
4486 comparison done in CC_MODE @var{mode}. The macro is used only in case
4487 @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} is nonzero. Define this macro in case
4488 machine has some non-standard way how to reverse certain conditionals. For
4489 instance in case all floating point conditions are non-trapping, compiler may
4490 freely convert unordered compares to ordered ones. Then definition may look
4491 like:
4492
4493 @smallexample
4494 #define REVERSE_CONDITION(CODE, MODE) \
4495 ((MODE) != CCFPmode ? reverse_condition (CODE) \
4496 : reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (CODE))
4497 @end smallexample
4498 @end defmac
4499
4500 @hook TARGET_FIXED_CONDITION_CODE_REGS
4501
4502 @hook TARGET_CC_MODES_COMPATIBLE
4503
4504 @hook TARGET_FLAGS_REGNUM
4505
4506 @node Costs
4507 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4508 @cindex costs of instructions
4509 @cindex relative costs
4510 @cindex speed of instructions
4511
4512 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4513 on the target machine.
4514
4515 @defmac REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4516 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} from a
4517 register in class @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are
4518 expressed using the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A
4519 value of 2 is the default; other values are interpreted relative to
4520 that.
4521
4522 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4523 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4524 registers if they are not general registers.
4525
4526 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4527 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4528 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4529 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4530 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4531 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4532
4533 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4534 @code{TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST} instead.
4535 @end defmac
4536
4537 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4538
4539 @defmac MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4540 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4541 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4542 is to be written to memory, nonzero if it is to be read in. This cost
4543 is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4544 registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4545 should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4546
4547 If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
4548 the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
4549 needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4550 between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4551 more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4552 reflect the actual cost of the move.
4553
4554 GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4555 secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4556 a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4557 secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
4558 4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4559 value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4560 are the same as to this macro.
4561
4562 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4563 @code{TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST} instead.
4564 @end defmac
4565
4566 @hook TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4567
4568 @defmac BRANCH_COST (@var{speed_p}, @var{predictable_p})
4569 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4570 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that. Parameter
4571 @var{speed_p} is true when the branch in question should be optimized
4572 for speed. When it is false, @code{BRANCH_COST} should return a value
4573 optimal for code size rather than performance. @var{predictable_p} is
4574 true for well-predicted branches. On many architectures the
4575 @code{BRANCH_COST} can be reduced then.
4576 @end defmac
4577
4578 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4579 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
4580 ordinarily expect.
4581
4582 @defmac SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4583 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4584 than a word of memory (i.e.@: a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4585 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4586 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4587 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4588
4589 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4590 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4591 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4592 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4593 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4594 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4595 @end defmac
4596
4597 @defmac SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (@var{mode}, @var{alignment})
4598 Define this macro to be the value 1 if memory accesses described by the
4599 @var{mode} and @var{alignment} parameters have a cost many times greater
4600 than aligned accesses, for example if they are emulated in a trap
4601 handler.
4602
4603 When this macro is nonzero, the compiler will act as if
4604 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} were nonzero when generating code for block
4605 moves. This can cause significantly more instructions to be produced.
4606 Therefore, do not set this macro nonzero if unaligned accesses only add a
4607 cycle or two to the time for a memory access.
4608
4609 If the value of this macro is always zero, it need not be defined. If
4610 this macro is defined, it should produce a nonzero value when
4611 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} is nonzero.
4612 @end defmac
4613
4614 @defmac MOVE_RATIO (@var{speed})
4615 The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4616 which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
4617 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4618 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4619
4620 Note that on machines where the corresponding move insn is a
4621 @code{define_expand} that emits a sequence of insns, this macro counts
4622 the number of such sequences.
4623
4624 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4625 optimized for speed rather than size.
4626
4627 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4628 @end defmac
4629
4630 @hook TARGET_USE_BY_PIECES_INFRASTRUCTURE_P
4631
4632 @defmac MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4633 A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4634 a load or store used to copy memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
4635 @end defmac
4636
4637 @defmac CLEAR_RATIO (@var{speed})
4638 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4639 of insns should be generated to clear memory instead of a string clear insn
4640 or a library call. Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4641 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4642
4643 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4644 optimized for speed rather than size.
4645
4646 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4647 @end defmac
4648
4649 @defmac SET_RATIO (@var{speed})
4650 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4651 of insns should be generated to set memory to a constant value, instead of
4652 a block set insn or a library call.
4653 Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4654 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4655
4656 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4657 optimized for speed rather than size.
4658
4659 If you don't define this, it defaults to the value of @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4660 @end defmac
4661
4662 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4663 A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
4664 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4665 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4666 @end defmac
4667
4668 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4669 A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
4670 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4671 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4672 @end defmac
4673
4674 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4675 A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
4676 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4677 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4678 @end defmac
4679
4680 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4681 A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
4682 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4683 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4684 @end defmac
4685
4686 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4687 A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
4688 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4689 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4690 @end defmac
4691
4692 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4693 A C expression used to determine whether a store postdecrement is a good
4694 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4695 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4696 @end defmac
4697
4698 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4699 This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
4700 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4701 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4702 @end defmac
4703
4704 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4705 This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
4706 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4707 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4708 @end defmac
4709
4710 @defmac NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4711 Define this macro to be true if it is as good or better to call a constant
4712 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4713 @end defmac
4714
4715 @defmac LOGICAL_OP_NON_SHORT_CIRCUIT
4716 Define this macro if a non-short-circuit operation produced by
4717 @samp{fold_range_test ()} is optimal. This macro defaults to true if
4718 @code{BRANCH_COST} is greater than or equal to the value 2.
4719 @end defmac
4720
4721 @hook TARGET_RTX_COSTS
4722
4723 @hook TARGET_ADDRESS_COST
4724
4725 @node Scheduling
4726 @section Adjusting the Instruction Scheduler
4727
4728 The instruction scheduler may need a fair amount of machine-specific
4729 adjustment in order to produce good code. GCC provides several target
4730 hooks for this purpose. It is usually enough to define just a few of
4731 them: try the first ones in this list first.
4732
4733 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE
4734
4735 @hook TARGET_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
4736
4737 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST
4738
4739 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_PRIORITY
4740
4741 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER
4742
4743 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER2
4744
4745 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_P
4746
4747 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_PAIR_P
4748
4749 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DEPENDENCIES_EVALUATION_HOOK
4750
4751 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT
4752
4753 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH
4754
4755 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_GLOBAL
4756
4757 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH_GLOBAL
4758
4759 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4760
4761 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4762
4763 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4764
4765 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4766
4767 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4768
4769 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4770
4771 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD
4772
4773 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD_GUARD
4774
4775 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BEGIN
4776
4777 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_ISSUE
4778
4779 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BACKTRACK
4780
4781 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_END
4782
4783 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_INIT
4784
4785 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_FINI
4786
4787 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_NEW_CYCLE
4788
4789 @hook TARGET_SCHED_IS_COSTLY_DEPENDENCE
4790
4791 @hook TARGET_SCHED_H_I_D_EXTENDED
4792
4793 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ALLOC_SCHED_CONTEXT
4794
4795 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_SCHED_CONTEXT
4796
4797 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_CONTEXT
4798
4799 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CLEAR_SCHED_CONTEXT
4800
4801 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FREE_SCHED_CONTEXT
4802
4803 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SPECULATE_INSN
4804
4805 @hook TARGET_SCHED_NEEDS_BLOCK_P
4806
4807 @hook TARGET_SCHED_GEN_SPEC_CHECK
4808
4809 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_FLAGS
4810
4811 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SMS_RES_MII
4812
4813 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH
4814
4815 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH_DO
4816
4817 @hook TARGET_SCHED_EXPOSED_PIPELINE
4818
4819 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REASSOCIATION_WIDTH
4820
4821 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FUSION_PRIORITY
4822
4823 @node Sections
4824 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4825 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4826 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4827
4828 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4829 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4830 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4831 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4832 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4833 of sections.
4834
4835 @file{varasm.c} provides several well-known sections, such as
4836 @code{text_section}, @code{data_section} and @code{bss_section}.
4837 The normal way of controlling a @code{@var{foo}_section} variable
4838 is to define the associated @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macro,
4839 as described below. The macros are only read once, when @file{varasm.c}
4840 initializes itself, so their values must be run-time constants.
4841 They may however depend on command-line flags.
4842
4843 @emph{Note:} Some run-time files, such @file{crtstuff.c}, also make
4844 use of the @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macros, and expect them
4845 to be string literals.
4846
4847 Some assemblers require a different string to be written every time a
4848 section is selected. If your assembler falls into this category, you
4849 should define the @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS} hook and use
4850 @code{get_unnamed_section} to set up the sections.
4851
4852 You must always create a @code{text_section}, either by defining
4853 @code{TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or by initializing @code{text_section}
4854 in @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS}. The same is true of
4855 @code{data_section} and @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP}. If you do not
4856 create a distinct @code{readonly_data_section}, the default is to
4857 reuse @code{text_section}.
4858
4859 All the other @file{varasm.c} sections are optional, and are null
4860 if the target does not provide them.
4861
4862 @defmac TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4863 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4864 assembler operation that should precede instructions and read-only data.
4865 Normally @code{"\t.text"} is right.
4866 @end defmac
4867
4868 @defmac HOT_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4869 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing most
4870 frequently executed functions of the program. If not defined, GCC will provide
4871 a default definition if the target supports named sections.
4872 @end defmac
4873
4874 @defmac UNLIKELY_EXECUTED_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4875 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing unlikely
4876 executed functions in the program.
4877 @end defmac
4878
4879 @defmac DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4880 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4881 assembler operation to identify the following data as writable initialized
4882 data. Normally @code{"\t.data"} is right.
4883 @end defmac
4884
4885 @defmac SDATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4886 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4887 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4888 initialized, writable small data.
4889 @end defmac
4890
4891 @defmac READONLY_DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4892 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4893 assembler operation to identify the following data as read-only initialized
4894 data.
4895 @end defmac
4896
4897 @defmac BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4898 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4899 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4900 uninitialized global data. If not defined, and
4901 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} not defined,
4902 uninitialized global data will be output in the data section if
4903 @option{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be
4904 used.
4905 @end defmac
4906
4907 @defmac SBSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4908 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4909 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4910 uninitialized, writable small data.
4911 @end defmac
4912
4913 @defmac TLS_COMMON_ASM_OP
4914 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4915 assembler operation to identify the following data as thread-local
4916 common data. The default is @code{".tls_common"}.
4917 @end defmac
4918
4919 @defmac TLS_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4920 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4921 containing the flag used to mark a section as a TLS section. The
4922 default is @code{'T'}.
4923 @end defmac
4924
4925 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4926 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4927 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4928 initialization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4929 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{init_section}
4930 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4931 @end defmac
4932
4933 @defmac FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP
4934 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4935 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4936 finalization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4937 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{fini_section}
4938 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4939 @end defmac
4940
4941 @defmac INIT_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4942 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4943 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4944 part of the @code{.init_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4945 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4946 both this macro and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4947 @end defmac
4948
4949 @defmac FINI_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4950 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4951 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4952 part of the @code{.fini_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4953 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4954 both this macro and @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4955 @end defmac
4956
4957 @defmac CRT_CALL_STATIC_FUNCTION (@var{section_op}, @var{function})
4958 If defined, an ASM statement that switches to a different section
4959 via @var{section_op}, calls @var{function}, and switches back to
4960 the text section. This is used in @file{crtstuff.c} if
4961 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP} to calls
4962 to initialization and finalization functions from the init and fini
4963 sections. By default, this macro uses a simple function call. Some
4964 ports need hand-crafted assembly code to avoid dependencies on
4965 registers initialized in the function prologue or to ensure that
4966 constant pools don't end up too far way in the text section.
4967 @end defmac
4968
4969 @defmac TARGET_LIBGCC_SDATA_SECTION
4970 If defined, a string which names the section into which small
4971 variables defined in crtstuff and libgcc should go. This is useful
4972 when the target has options for optimizing access to small data, and
4973 you want the crtstuff and libgcc routines to be conservative in what
4974 they expect of your application yet liberal in what your application
4975 expects. For example, for targets with a @code{.sdata} section (like
4976 MIPS), you could compile crtstuff with @code{-G 0} so that it doesn't
4977 require small data support from your application, but use this macro
4978 to put small data into @code{.sdata} so that your application can
4979 access these variables whether it uses small data or not.
4980 @end defmac
4981
4982 @defmac FORCE_CODE_SECTION_ALIGN
4983 If defined, an ASM statement that aligns a code section to some
4984 arbitrary boundary. This is used to force all fragments of the
4985 @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections to have to same alignment
4986 and thus prevent the linker from having to add any padding.
4987 @end defmac
4988
4989 @defmac JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
4990 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if jump
4991 tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
4992 section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
4993 readonly data section is used.
4994
4995 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
4996 @end defmac
4997
4998 @hook TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS
4999
5000 @hook TARGET_ASM_RELOC_RW_MASK
5001
5002 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION
5003
5004 @defmac USE_SELECT_SECTION_FOR_FUNCTIONS
5005 Define this macro if you wish TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION to be called
5006 for @code{FUNCTION_DECL}s as well as for variables and constants.
5007
5008 In the case of a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, @var{reloc} will be zero if the
5009 function has been determined to be likely to be called, and nonzero if
5010 it is unlikely to be called.
5011 @end defmac
5012
5013 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNIQUE_SECTION
5014
5015 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_RODATA_SECTION
5016
5017 @hook TARGET_ASM_MERGEABLE_RODATA_PREFIX
5018
5019 @hook TARGET_ASM_TM_CLONE_TABLE_SECTION
5020
5021 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_RTX_SECTION
5022
5023 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_DECL_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5024
5025 @hook TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
5026
5027 @hook TARGET_STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
5028
5029 @hook TARGET_IN_SMALL_DATA_P
5030
5031 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SRODATA_SECTION
5032
5033 @hook TARGET_PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
5034
5035 @hook TARGET_BINDS_LOCAL_P
5036
5037 @hook TARGET_HAVE_TLS
5038
5039
5040 @node PIC
5041 @section Position Independent Code
5042 @cindex position independent code
5043 @cindex PIC
5044
5045 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
5046 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
5047 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the hook
5048 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} and to the macro
5049 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You
5050 must modify the definition of @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate
5051 when the source operand contains a symbolic address. You may also
5052 need to alter the handling of switch statements so that they use
5053 relative addresses.
5054 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
5055 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
5056
5057 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5058 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
5059 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
5060 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI)@. When this macro
5061 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
5062 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
5063 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
5064 necessary). Note that this register must be fixed when in use (e.g.@:
5065 when @code{flag_pic} is true).
5066 @end defmac
5067
5068 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5069 A C expression that is nonzero if the register defined by
5070 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. If not defined,
5071 the default is zero. Do not define
5072 this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
5073 @end defmac
5074
5075 @defmac LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
5076 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
5077 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
5078 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
5079 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
5080 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
5081 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
5082 position independent code.
5083 @end defmac
5084
5085 @node Assembler Format
5086 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
5087
5088 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
5089 to write instructions in assembler language---rather than what the
5090 instructions do.
5091
5092 @menu
5093 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
5094 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
5095 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
5096 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
5097 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
5098 and termination routines.
5099 * Macros for Initialization::
5100 Specific macros that control the handling of
5101 initialization and termination routines.
5102 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5103 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5104 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5105 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5106 @end menu
5107
5108 @node File Framework
5109 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5110 @cindex assembler format
5111 @cindex output of assembler code
5112
5113 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5114 This describes the overall framework of an assembly file.
5115
5116 @findex default_file_start
5117 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START
5118
5119 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_APP_OFF
5120
5121 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_FILE_DIRECTIVE
5122
5123 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_END
5124
5125 @deftypefun void file_end_indicate_exec_stack ()
5126 Some systems use a common convention, the @samp{.note.GNU-stack}
5127 special section, to indicate whether or not an object file relies on
5128 the stack being executable. If your system uses this convention, you
5129 should define @code{TARGET_ASM_FILE_END} to this function. If you
5130 need to do other things in that hook, have your hook function call
5131 this function.
5132 @end deftypefun
5133
5134 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_START
5135
5136 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_END
5137
5138 @hook TARGET_ASM_CODE_END
5139
5140 @defmac ASM_COMMENT_START
5141 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5142 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5143 the end of the line.
5144 @end defmac
5145
5146 @defmac ASM_APP_ON
5147 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5148 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5149 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5150 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5151 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5152 @end defmac
5153
5154 @defmac ASM_APP_OFF
5155 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5156 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5157 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5158 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5159 @end defmac
5160
5161 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5162 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5163 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5164 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5165
5166 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5167 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5168 @end defmac
5169
5170 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5171
5172 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5173
5174 @defmac OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5175 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5176 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5177 in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
5178 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5179 of the filename using this macro.
5180 @end defmac
5181
5182 @hook TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION
5183
5184 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SECTION
5185
5186 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SWITCHED_TEXT_SECTIONS
5187
5188 @hook TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS
5189 This flag is true if the target supports @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION}.
5190 It must not be modified by command-line option processing.
5191 @end deftypevr
5192
5193 @anchor{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}
5194 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS
5195
5196 @hook TARGET_SECTION_TYPE_FLAGS
5197
5198 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES
5199
5200 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES_SECTION
5201
5202 @need 2000
5203 @node Data Output
5204 @subsection Output of Data
5205
5206
5207 @hook TARGET_ASM_BYTE_OP
5208
5209 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTEGER
5210
5211 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECL_END
5212
5213 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_CONST_EXTRA
5214
5215 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5216 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5217 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5218 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5219 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5220
5221 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5222 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5223 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5224 @end defmac
5225
5226 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FDESC (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{n})
5227 A C statement to output word @var{n} of a function descriptor for
5228 @var{decl}. This must be defined if @code{TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS}
5229 is defined, and is otherwise unused.
5230 @end defmac
5231
5232 @defmac CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5233 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5234 expression to have a nonzero value if GCC should output the constant
5235 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5236 GCC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5237 not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
5238 pool before the function.
5239 @end defmac
5240
5241 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{funname}, @var{fundecl}, @var{size})
5242 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5243 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5244 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5245 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5246 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5247 immediately after this call.
5248
5249 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5250 not be defined.
5251 @end defmac
5252
5253 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5254 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5255 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5256 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5257
5258 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5259 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5260 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5261 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5262 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5263 alignment.
5264
5265 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5266 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5267 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5268 Here is how to do this:
5269
5270 @smallexample
5271 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5272 @end smallexample
5273
5274 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5275 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5276 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5277
5278 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5279 @end defmac
5280
5281 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5282 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5283 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5284 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5285 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5286 constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
5287
5288 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5289 define this macro.
5290 @end defmac
5291
5292 @defmac IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C}, @var{STR})
5293 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5294 used as a logical line separator by the assembler. @var{STR} points
5295 to the position in the string where @var{C} was found; this can be used if
5296 a line separator uses multiple characters.
5297
5298 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5299 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5300 @end defmac
5301
5302 @hook TARGET_ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5303
5304 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5305 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5306
5307 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5308 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5309 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5310 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5311 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL64 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5312 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL128 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5313 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the
5314 target's floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in
5315 the variable @var{l}. For @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE} and
5316 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32}, this variable should be a
5317 simple @code{long int}. For the others, it should be an array of
5318 @code{long int}. The number of elements in this array is determined
5319 by the size of the desired target floating point data type: 32 bits of
5320 it go in each @code{long int} array element. Each array element holds
5321 32 bits of the result, even if @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits
5322 on the host machine.
5323
5324 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5325 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5326 machine's memory.
5327 @end defmac
5328
5329 @node Uninitialized Data
5330 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5331
5332 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5333 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5334
5335 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5336 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5337 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5338 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5339 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants. It is
5340 possible that @var{size} may be zero, for instance if a struct with no
5341 other member than a zero-length array is defined. In this case, the
5342 backend must output a symbol definition that allocates at least one
5343 byte, both so that the address of the resulting object does not compare
5344 equal to any other, and because some object formats cannot even express
5345 the concept of a zero-sized common symbol, as that is how they represent
5346 an ordinary undefined external.
5347
5348 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5349 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5350 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5351
5352 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5353 common global variables are output.
5354 @end defmac
5355
5356 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5357 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5358 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5359 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5360 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5361 as the number of bits.
5362 @end defmac
5363
5364 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5365 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5366 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5367 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5368 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5369 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5370 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5371 @end defmac
5372
5373 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5374 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5375 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5376 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{alignment}
5377 is the alignment specified as the number of bits.
5378
5379 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5380 @file{varasm.c} when defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5381 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5382 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5383 the name, and a newline.
5384
5385 There are two ways of handling global BSS@. One is to define this macro.
5386 The other is to have @code{TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION} return a
5387 switchable BSS section (@pxref{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}).
5388 You do not need to do both.
5389
5390 Some languages do not have @code{common} data, and require a
5391 non-common form of global BSS in order to handle uninitialized globals
5392 efficiently. C++ is one example of this. However, if the target does
5393 not support global BSS, the front end may choose to make globals
5394 common in order to save space in the object file.
5395 @end defmac
5396
5397 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5398 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5399 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5400 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5401 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5402
5403 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5404 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5405 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5406
5407 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5408 static variables are output.
5409 @end defmac
5410
5411 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5412 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5413 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5414 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5415 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5416 as the number of bits.
5417 @end defmac
5418
5419 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5420 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5421 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5422 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5423 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5424 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5425 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5426 @end defmac
5427
5428 @node Label Output
5429 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5430
5431 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5432 This is about outputting labels.
5433
5434 @findex assemble_name
5435 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5436 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5437 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5438 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5439 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5440 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5441 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5442 @end defmac
5443
5444 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5445 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5446 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name} of
5447 a function.
5448 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5449 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5450 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5451 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5452
5453 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5454 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5455 @end defmac
5456
5457 @findex assemble_name_raw
5458 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5459 Identical to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}, except that @var{name} is known
5460 to refer to a compiler-generated label. The default definition uses
5461 @code{assemble_name_raw}, which is like @code{assemble_name} except
5462 that it is more efficient.
5463 @end defmac
5464
5465 @defmac SIZE_ASM_OP
5466 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5467 size of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5468 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.size\t"}; on other
5469 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5470
5471 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definitions
5472 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE}
5473 for your system. If you need your own custom definitions of those
5474 macros, or if you do not need explicit symbol sizes at all, do not
5475 define this macro.
5476 @end defmac
5477
5478 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size})
5479 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5480 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the size of the
5481 symbol @var{name} is @var{size}. @var{size} is a @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}.
5482 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5483 provided.
5484 @end defmac
5485
5486 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5487 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5488 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler to calculate the size of
5489 the symbol @var{name} by subtracting its address from the current
5490 address.
5491
5492 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5493 provided. The default assumes that the assembler recognizes a special
5494 @samp{.} symbol as referring to the current address, and can calculate
5495 the difference between this and another symbol. If your assembler does
5496 not recognize @samp{.} or cannot do calculations with it, you will need
5497 to redefine @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} to use some other technique.
5498 @end defmac
5499
5500 @defmac NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
5501 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5502 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
5503 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
5504 @samp{.} is used instead.
5505 @end defmac
5506
5507 @defmac NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
5508 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5509 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
5510 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
5511 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
5512 @end defmac
5513
5514 @defmac TYPE_ASM_OP
5515 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5516 type of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5517 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.type\t"}; on other
5518 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5519
5520 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5521 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5522 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5523 types at all, do not define this macro.
5524 @end defmac
5525
5526 @defmac TYPE_OPERAND_FMT
5527 A C string which specifies (using @code{printf} syntax) the format of
5528 the second operand to @code{TYPE_ASM_OP}. On systems that use ELF, the
5529 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"@@%s"}; on other systems,
5530 the default is not to define this macro.
5531
5532 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5533 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5534 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5535 types at all, do not define this macro.
5536 @end defmac
5537
5538 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{type})
5539 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5540 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the type of the
5541 symbol @var{name} is @var{type}. @var{type} is a C string; currently,
5542 that string is always either @samp{"function"} or @samp{"object"}, but
5543 you should not count on this.
5544
5545 If you define @code{TYPE_ASM_OP} and @code{TYPE_OPERAND_FMT}, a default
5546 definition of this macro is provided.
5547 @end defmac
5548
5549 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5550 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5551 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5552 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5553 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5554 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5555 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5556
5557 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5558 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}).
5559
5560 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5561 of this macro.
5562 @end defmac
5563
5564 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5565 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5566 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5567 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5568 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5569 representing the function.
5570
5571 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5572
5573 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5574 of this macro.
5575 @end defmac
5576
5577 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5578 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5579 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5580 cold function partition which is being defined. This macro is responsible
5581 for outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5582 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5583 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5584
5585 If this macro is not defined, then the cold partition name is defined in the
5586 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5587
5588 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5589 of this macro.
5590 @end defmac
5591
5592 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5593 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5594 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a cold function
5595 partition which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5596 cold partition of the function. The argument @var{decl} is the
5597 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5598
5599 If this macro is not defined, then the partition size is not defined.
5600
5601 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5602 of this macro.
5603 @end defmac
5604
5605 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5606 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5607 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5608 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5609 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5610 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5611
5612 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5613 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5614
5615 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5616 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition of this macro.
5617 @end defmac
5618
5619 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECLARE_CONSTANT_NAME
5620
5621 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
5622 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5623 @var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
5624 for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
5625
5626 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5627 nothing.
5628 @end defmac
5629
5630 @defmac ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5631 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5632 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5633 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5634 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5635 something about the size of the object.
5636
5637 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5638 nothing.
5639
5640 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5641 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition of this macro.
5642 @end defmac
5643
5644 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5645
5646 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_DECL_NAME
5647
5648 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_UNDEFINED_DECL
5649
5650 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5651 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5652 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5653 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5654 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5655 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5656 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5657 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5658
5659 If you don't define this macro or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}, GCC will not
5660 support weak symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK}
5661 macro.
5662 @end defmac
5663
5664 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_DECL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5665 Combines (and replaces) the function of @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} and
5666 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS}, allowing access to the associated function
5667 or variable decl. If @var{value} is not @code{NULL}, this C statement
5668 should output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code which
5669 defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5670 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it should output commands
5671 to make @var{name} weak.
5672 @end defmac
5673
5674 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAKREF (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5675 Outputs a directive that enables @var{name} to be used to refer to
5676 symbol @var{value} with weak-symbol semantics. @code{decl} is the
5677 declaration of @code{name}.
5678 @end defmac
5679
5680 @defmac SUPPORTS_WEAK
5681 A preprocessor constant expression which evaluates to true if the target
5682 supports weak symbols.
5683
5684 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5685 definition. If either @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}
5686 is defined, the default definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}.
5687 @end defmac
5688
5689 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WEAK
5690 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5691
5692 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5693 definition. The default definition is @samp{(SUPPORTS_WEAK)}. Define
5694 this macro if you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler
5695 flag such as @option{-melf}.
5696 @end defmac
5697
5698 @defmac MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5699 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5700 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5701 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5702 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5703 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5704 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5705 @end defmac
5706
5707 @defmac SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5708 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5709 semantics.
5710
5711 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5712 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5713 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5714 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5715 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5716 be emitted as one-only.
5717 @end defmac
5718
5719 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_VISIBILITY
5720
5721 @defmac TARGET_WEAK_NOT_IN_ARCHIVE_TOC
5722 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target's linker expects
5723 that weak symbols do not appear in a static archive's table of contents.
5724 The default is @code{0}.
5725
5726 Leaving weak symbols out of an archive's table of contents means that,
5727 if a symbol will only have a definition in one translation unit and
5728 will have undefined references from other translation units, that
5729 symbol should not be weak. Defining this macro to be nonzero will
5730 thus have the effect that certain symbols that would normally be weak
5731 (explicit template instantiations, and vtables for polymorphic classes
5732 with noninline key methods) will instead be nonweak.
5733
5734 The C++ ABI requires this macro to be zero. Define this macro for
5735 targets where full C++ ABI compliance is impossible and where linker
5736 restrictions require weak symbols to be left out of a static archive's
5737 table of contents.
5738 @end defmac
5739
5740 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5741 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5742 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5743 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5744 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5745 declaration.
5746
5747 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5748 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5749 @end defmac
5750
5751 @hook TARGET_ASM_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5752
5753 @hook TARGET_ASM_MARK_DECL_PRESERVED
5754
5755 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5756 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5757 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5758 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5759 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5760 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5761 @end defmac
5762
5763 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5764
5765 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SYMBOL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{sym})
5766 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to
5767 @code{SYMBOL_REF} @var{sym}. If not defined, @code{assemble_name}
5768 will be used to output the name of the symbol. This macro may be used
5769 to modify the way a symbol is referenced depending on information
5770 encoded by @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}.
5771 @end defmac
5772
5773 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{buf})
5774 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to @var{buf}, the
5775 result of @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL}. If not defined,
5776 @code{assemble_name} will be used to output the name of the symbol.
5777 This macro is not used by @code{output_asm_label}, or the @code{%l}
5778 specifier that calls it; the intention is that this macro should be set
5779 when it is necessary to output a label differently when its address is
5780 being taken.
5781 @end defmac
5782
5783 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTERNAL_LABEL
5784
5785 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEBUG_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5786 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a debug info
5787 label whose name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number
5788 @var{num}. This is useful for VLIW targets, where debug info labels
5789 may need to be treated differently than branch target labels. On some
5790 systems, branch target labels must be at the beginning of instruction
5791 bundles, but debug info labels can occur in the middle of instruction
5792 bundles.
5793
5794 If this macro is not defined, then @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} will be
5795 used.
5796 @end defmac
5797
5798 @defmac ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5799 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5800 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5801
5802 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5803 produce the output that @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} would produce
5804 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5805
5806 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5807 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5808 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5809 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5810 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5811 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5812 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5813 @end defmac
5814
5815 @defmac ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5816 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5817 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5818 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5819 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5820
5821 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5822 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5823 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5824 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5825 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5826 internal static variables in different scopes.
5827
5828 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5829 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5830 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5831 between the name and the number will suffice.
5832
5833 If this macro is not defined, a default definition will be provided
5834 which is correct for most systems.
5835 @end defmac
5836
5837 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5838 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5839 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5840
5841 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5842 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5843 correct for most systems.
5844 @end defmac
5845
5846 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5847 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5848 which defines (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
5849 to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}. This macro will
5850 be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
5851 the tree nodes are available.
5852
5853 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5854 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5855 correct for most systems.
5856 @end defmac
5857
5858 @defmac TARGET_DEFERRED_OUTPUT_DEFS (@var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5859 A C statement that evaluates to true if the assembler code which defines
5860 (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name} to have the value
5861 of the tree node @var{decl_of_value} should be emitted near the end of the
5862 current compilation unit. The default is to not defer output of defines.
5863 This macro affects defines output by @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} and
5864 @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS}.
5865 @end defmac
5866
5867 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5868 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5869 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5870 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it defines @var{name} as
5871 an undefined weak symbol.
5872
5873 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5874 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} instead if possible.
5875 @end defmac
5876
5877 @defmac OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5878 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5879 Objective-C methods.
5880
5881 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5882 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5883 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5884 @samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
5885
5886 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5887 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5888 systems define other ways of computing names.
5889
5890 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5891 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5892 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
5893 50 characters extra.
5894
5895 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5896 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5897 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or @code{NULL} if the method is not
5898 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5899
5900 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5901 macro to provide more human-readable names.
5902 @end defmac
5903
5904 @node Initialization
5905 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5906 @cindex initialization routines
5907 @cindex termination routines
5908 @cindex constructors, output of
5909 @cindex destructors, output of
5910
5911 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5912 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5913 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5914 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5915 @code{main} is called.
5916
5917 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
5918 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
5919 terminates.
5920
5921 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
5922 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
5923 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
5924 system, you need to specify how to do this.
5925
5926 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
5927 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
5928 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
5929
5930 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
5931 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
5932 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
5933 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
5934 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
5935
5936 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
5937 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
5938 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
5939 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
5940 pointer containing zero.
5941
5942 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
5943 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
5944 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
5945 list; destructors in forward order.
5946
5947 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
5948 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
5949 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
5950 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
5951 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
5952 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
5953 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
5954 Termination functions are handled similarly.
5955
5956 This method will be chosen as the default by @file{target-def.h} if
5957 @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION} is defined. A target that does not
5958 support arbitrary sections, but does support special designated
5959 constructor and destructor sections may define @code{CTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5960 and @code{DTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP} to achieve the same effect.
5961
5962 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
5963 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
5964 support a @dfn{.init} section which is executed at program startup,
5965 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
5966 program is linked by the @command{gcc} driver like this:
5967
5968 @smallexample
5969 ld -o @var{output_file} crti.o crtbegin.o @dots{} -lgcc crtend.o crtn.o
5970 @end smallexample
5971
5972 The prologue of a function (@code{__init}) appears in the @code{.init}
5973 section of @file{crti.o}; the epilogue appears in @file{crtn.o}. Likewise
5974 for the function @code{__fini} in the @dfn{.fini} section. Normally these
5975 files are provided by the operating system or by the GNU C library, but
5976 are provided by GCC for a few targets.
5977
5978 The objects @file{crtbegin.o} and @file{crtend.o} are (for most targets)
5979 compiled from @file{crtstuff.c}. They contain, among other things, code
5980 fragments within the @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections that branch
5981 to routines in the @code{.text} section. The linker will pull all parts
5982 of a section together, which results in a complete @code{__init} function
5983 that invokes the routines we need at startup.
5984
5985 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5986 macro properly.
5987
5988 If no init section is available, when GCC compiles any function called
5989 @code{main} (or more accurately, any function designated as a program
5990 entry point by the language front end calling @code{expand_main_function}),
5991 it inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
5992 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function is defined
5993 in @file{libgcc2.c} and runs the global constructors.
5994
5995 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
5996 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
5997 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
5998 @code{TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
5999 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
6000 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
6001 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
6002 the value to a @dfn{set}; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
6003 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
6004 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
6005 @code{TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
6006 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
6007 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
6008 the initialization process.
6009
6010 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
6011 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
6012 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'@. In
6013 this case, @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is false, initialization and
6014 termination functions are recognized simply by their names. This requires
6015 an extra program in the linkage step, called @command{collect2}. This program
6016 pretends to be the linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running
6017 the ordinary linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of
6018 initialization and termination functions. These functions are called
6019 via @code{__main} as described above. In order to use this method,
6020 @code{use_collect2} must be defined in the target in @file{config.gcc}.
6021
6022 @ifinfo
6023 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
6024 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
6025 @end ifinfo
6026
6027 @node Macros for Initialization
6028 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
6029
6030 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
6031 and termination functions:
6032
6033 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
6034 If defined, a C string constant, including spacing, for the assembler
6035 operation to identify the following data as initialization code. If not
6036 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. When you are
6037 using special sections for initialization and termination functions, this
6038 macro also controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to
6039 run the initialization functions.
6040 @end defmac
6041
6042 @defmac HAS_INIT_SECTION
6043 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
6044 This macro should be defined for systems that control start-up code
6045 on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
6046 be defined explicitly for systems that support @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
6047 @end defmac
6048
6049 @defmac LD_INIT_SWITCH
6050 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6051 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
6052 @end defmac
6053
6054 @defmac LD_FINI_SWITCH
6055 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6056 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
6057 @end defmac
6058
6059 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_INIT_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6060 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6061 automatically called when a shared library is loaded. The function
6062 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6063 the object format requires an explicit initialization function, then a
6064 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DI} will be generated.
6065
6066 This function and the following one are used by collect2 when linking a
6067 shared library that needs constructors or destructors, or has DWARF2
6068 exception tables embedded in the code.
6069 @end defmac
6070
6071 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_FINI_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6072 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6073 automatically called when a shared library is unloaded. The function
6074 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6075 the object format requires an explicit finalization function, then a
6076 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DD} will be generated.
6077 @end defmac
6078
6079 @defmac INVOKE__main
6080 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
6081 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
6082 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
6083 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
6084 @end defmac
6085
6086 @defmac SUPPORTS_INIT_PRIORITY
6087 If nonzero, the C++ @code{init_priority} attribute is supported and the
6088 compiler should emit instructions to control the order of initialization
6089 of objects. If zero, the compiler will issue an error message upon
6090 encountering an @code{init_priority} attribute.
6091 @end defmac
6092
6093 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS
6094
6095 @hook TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR
6096
6097 @hook TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR
6098
6099 If @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is true, the initialization routine
6100 generated for the generated object file will have static linkage.
6101
6102 If your system uses @command{collect2} as the means of processing
6103 constructors, then that program normally uses @command{nm} to scan
6104 an object file for constructor functions to be called.
6105
6106 On certain kinds of systems, you can define this macro to make
6107 @command{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
6108
6109 @defmac OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6110 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
6111 object files, so that @command{collect2} can assume this format and scan
6112 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6113
6114 This macro is effective only in a native compiler; @command{collect2} as
6115 part of a cross compiler always uses @command{nm} for the target machine.
6116 @end defmac
6117
6118 @defmac REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6119 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
6120 to execute @command{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
6121 @command{nm}.
6122 @end defmac
6123
6124 @defmac NM_FLAGS
6125 @command{collect2} calls @command{nm} to scan object files for static
6126 constructors and destructors and LTO info. By default, @option{-n} is
6127 passed. Define @code{NM_FLAGS} to a C string constant if other options
6128 are needed to get the same output format as GNU @command{nm -n}
6129 produces.
6130 @end defmac
6131
6132 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
6133 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
6134 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
6135 termination functions in shared libraries:
6136
6137 @defmac LDD_SUFFIX
6138 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the program
6139 which lists dynamic dependencies, like @command{ldd} under SunOS 4.
6140 @end defmac
6141
6142 @defmac PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{ptr})
6143 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
6144 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{ptr} is a variable
6145 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
6146 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
6147 code must advance @var{ptr} to the beginning of the filename on that
6148 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{ptr} to @code{NULL}.
6149 @end defmac
6150
6151 @defmac SHLIB_SUFFIX
6152 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the default shared
6153 library extension of the target (e.g., @samp{".so"}). @command{collect2}
6154 strips version information after this suffix when generating global
6155 constructor and destructor names. This define is only needed on targets
6156 that use @command{collect2} to process constructors and destructors.
6157 @end defmac
6158
6159 @node Instruction Output
6160 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
6161
6162 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6163 This describes assembler instruction output.
6164
6165 @defmac REGISTER_NAMES
6166 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
6167 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
6168 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
6169 @end defmac
6170
6171 @defmac ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6172 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
6173 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
6174 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
6175 to registers using alternate names.
6176 @end defmac
6177
6178 @defmac OVERLAPPING_REGISTER_NAMES
6179 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a
6180 name, a register number and a count of the number of consecutive
6181 machine registers the name overlaps. This macro defines additional
6182 names for hard registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in
6183 declarations to refer to registers using alternate names. Unlike
6184 @code{ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES}, this macro should be used when the
6185 register name implies multiple underlying registers.
6186
6187 This macro should be used when it is important that a clobber in an
6188 @code{asm} statement clobbers all the underlying values implied by the
6189 register name. For example, on ARM, clobbering the double-precision
6190 VFP register ``d0'' implies clobbering both single-precision registers
6191 ``s0'' and ``s1''.
6192 @end defmac
6193
6194 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
6195 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
6196 requires different names for the machine instructions.
6197
6198 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6199 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6200 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6201 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6202 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6203 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6204 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6205 so that it will not be output twice.
6206
6207 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6208 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6209 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6210 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6211 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6212
6213 @findex recog_data.operand
6214 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6215 elements of @code{recog_data.operand}.
6216
6217 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6218 in the usual way.
6219 @end defmac
6220
6221 @defmac FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6222 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6223 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6224 they will be output differently.
6225
6226 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6227 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6228 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6229 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6230 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6231 by changing the contents of the vector.
6232
6233 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6234 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6235 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6236 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6237 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6238 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6239
6240 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6241 @end defmac
6242
6243 @hook TARGET_ASM_FINAL_POSTSCAN_INSN
6244
6245 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6246 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6247 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6248 RTL expression.
6249
6250 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6251 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6252 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6253 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6254 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6255 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6256 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6257
6258 @findex reg_names
6259 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6260 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6261 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6262 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6263
6264 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6265 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6266 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6267 @var{code}.
6268 @end defmac
6269
6270 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6271 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6272 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6273 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6274 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6275 in this way.
6276 @end defmac
6277
6278 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6279 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6280 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6281 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6282
6283 @cindex @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6284 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6285 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the hook
6286 @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6287 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler
6288 Format}.
6289 @end defmac
6290
6291 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6292 @defmac DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND (@var{file})
6293 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6294 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6295 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6296 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6297 or whatever.
6298
6299 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6300 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6301 explicit (e.g.@: with white space).
6302 @end defmac
6303
6304 @findex final_sequence
6305 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6306 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence
6307 (i.e.@: when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6308 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6309 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6310 being output.
6311
6312 @findex asm_fprintf
6313 @defmac REGISTER_PREFIX
6314 @defmacx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6315 @defmacx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6316 @defmacx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6317 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6318 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6319 @file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6320 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6321 files can define these macros differently.
6322 @end defmac
6323
6324 @defmac ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS (@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
6325 If defined this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
6326 statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
6327 the @code{asm_fprintf} function. This allows targets to define extra
6328 printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
6329 statements. Note that uppercase letters are reserved for future
6330 generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
6331 specific code. The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
6332 The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
6333 string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
6334 upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
6335 @end defmac
6336
6337 @defmac ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6338 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6339 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6340 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6341 first variant.
6342
6343 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6344 @smallexample
6345 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}}
6346 @end smallexample
6347 @noindent
6348 in the output templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the
6349 first argument of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs
6350 @samp{option0}, @samp{option1}, @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6351 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one, two, etc. Any special characters
6352 within these strings retain their usual meaning. If there are fewer
6353 alternatives within the braces than the value of
6354 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT}, the construct outputs nothing. If it's needed
6355 to print curly braces or @samp{|} character in assembler output directly,
6356 @samp{%@{}, @samp{%@}} and @samp{%|} can be used.
6357
6358 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6359 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6360 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6361
6362 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6363 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6364 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6365 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6366 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6367 opcodes or operand order.
6368 @end defmac
6369
6370 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6371 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6372 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6373 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6374 profiling.
6375 @end defmac
6376
6377 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6378 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6379 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6380 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6381 profiling.
6382 @end defmac
6383
6384 @node Dispatch Tables
6385 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6386
6387 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6388 This concerns dispatch tables.
6389
6390 @cindex dispatch table
6391 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6392 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6393 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6394 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6395 definitions of these labels are output using
6396 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}, and they must be printed in the same
6397 way here. For example,
6398
6399 @smallexample
6400 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6401 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6402 @end smallexample
6403
6404 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6405 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GCC
6406 will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC@.
6407 @var{body} is the body of the @code{ADDR_DIFF_VEC}; it is provided so that the
6408 mode and flags can be read.
6409 @end defmac
6410
6411 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6412 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6413 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6414
6415 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6416 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6417 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6418 definition is output using @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6419 For example,
6420
6421 @smallexample
6422 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6423 @end smallexample
6424 @end defmac
6425
6426 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6427 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6428 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6429 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}; the fourth argument is the
6430 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_table_data} containing an
6431 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6432
6433 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6434 for the table.
6435
6436 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6437 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6438 @end defmac
6439
6440 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6441 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6442 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6443 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6444 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6445 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6446 of the preceding label.
6447
6448 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6449 the jump-table.
6450 @end defmac
6451
6452 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_UNWIND_LABEL
6453
6454 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_TABLE_LABEL
6455
6456 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_PERSONALITY
6457
6458 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT
6459
6460 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT_BEFORE_INSN
6461
6462 @node Exception Region Output
6463 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6464
6465 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6466
6467 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6468 region.
6469
6470 @defmac EH_FRAME_SECTION_NAME
6471 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing
6472 exception handling frame unwind information. If not defined, GCC will
6473 provide a default definition if the target supports named sections.
6474 @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the appropriate section.
6475
6476 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6477 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6478 @end defmac
6479
6480 @defmac EH_FRAME_THROUGH_COLLECT2
6481 If defined, DWARF 2 frame unwind information will identified by
6482 specially named labels. The collect2 process will locate these
6483 labels and generate code to register the frames.
6484
6485 This might be necessary, for instance, if the system linker will not
6486 place the eh_frames in-between the sentinals from @file{crtstuff.c},
6487 or if the system linker does garbage collection and sections cannot
6488 be marked as not to be collected.
6489 @end defmac
6490
6491 @defmac EH_TABLES_CAN_BE_READ_ONLY
6492 Define this macro to 1 if your target is such that no frame unwind
6493 information encoding used with non-PIC code will ever require a
6494 runtime relocation, but the linker may not support merging read-only
6495 and read-write sections into a single read-write section.
6496 @end defmac
6497
6498 @defmac MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6499 An rtx used to mask the return address found via @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX}, so
6500 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6501 @end defmac
6502
6503 @defmac DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6504 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6505 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6506 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6507 @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and @code{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}),
6508 GCC will provide a default definition of 1.
6509 @end defmac
6510
6511 @hook TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO
6512 This hook defines the mechanism that will be used for exception handling
6513 by the target. If the target has ABI specified unwind tables, the hook
6514 should return @code{UI_TARGET}. If the target is to use the
6515 @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling scheme, the hook
6516 should return @code{UI_SJLJ}. If the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6517 information, the hook should return @code{UI_DWARF2}.
6518
6519 A target may, if exceptions are disabled, choose to return @code{UI_NONE}.
6520 This may end up simplifying other parts of target-specific code. The
6521 default implementation of this hook never returns @code{UI_NONE}.
6522
6523 Note that the value returned by this hook should be constant. It should
6524 not depend on anything except the command-line switches described by
6525 @var{opts}. In particular, the
6526 setting @code{UI_SJLJ} must be fixed at compiler start-up as C pre-processor
6527 macros and builtin functions related to exception handling are set up
6528 depending on this setting.
6529
6530 The default implementation of the hook first honors the
6531 @option{--enable-sjlj-exceptions} configure option, then
6532 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}, and finally defaults to @code{UI_SJLJ}. If
6533 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO} depends on command-line options, the target
6534 must define this hook so that @var{opts} is used correctly.
6535 @end deftypefn
6536
6537 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_TABLES_DEFAULT
6538 This variable should be set to @code{true} if the target ABI requires unwinding
6539 tables even when exceptions are not used. It must not be modified by
6540 command-line option processing.
6541 @end deftypevr
6542
6543 @defmac DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP
6544 Define this macro to 1 if the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based scheme
6545 should use the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp} functions from the C library
6546 instead of the @code{__builtin_setjmp}/@code{__builtin_longjmp} machinery.
6547 @end defmac
6548
6549 @defmac JMP_BUF_SIZE
6550 This macro has no effect unless @code{DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP} is also
6551 defined. Define this macro if the default size of @code{jmp_buf} buffer
6552 for the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism
6553 is not large enough, or if it is much too large.
6554 The default size is @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER * sizeof(void *)}.
6555 @end defmac
6556
6557 @defmac DWARF_CIE_DATA_ALIGNMENT
6558 This macro need only be defined if the target might save registers in the
6559 function prologue at an offset to the stack pointer that is not aligned to
6560 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. The definition should be the negative minimum
6561 alignment if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is true, and the positive
6562 minimum alignment otherwise. @xref{SDB and DWARF}. Only applicable if
6563 the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind information.
6564 @end defmac
6565
6566 @hook TARGET_TERMINATE_DW2_EH_FRAME_INFO
6567
6568 @hook TARGET_DWARF_REGISTER_SPAN
6569
6570 @hook TARGET_DWARF_FRAME_REG_MODE
6571
6572 @hook TARGET_INIT_DWARF_REG_SIZES_EXTRA
6573
6574 @hook TARGET_ASM_TTYPE
6575
6576 @hook TARGET_ARM_EABI_UNWINDER
6577
6578 @node Alignment Output
6579 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6580
6581 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6582 This describes commands for alignment.
6583
6584 @defmac JUMP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6585 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which is
6586 a common destination of jumps and has no fallthru incoming edge.
6587
6588 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6589 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6590 define the macro.
6591
6592 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6593 to set the variable @var{align_jumps} in the target's
6594 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6595 selection in @var{align_jumps} in a @code{JUMP_ALIGN} implementation.
6596 @end defmac
6597
6598 @hook TARGET_ASM_JUMP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6599
6600 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6601 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6602 a @code{BARRIER}.
6603
6604 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6605 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6606 define the macro.
6607 @end defmac
6608
6609 @hook TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER_MAX_SKIP
6610
6611 @defmac LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6612 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label} that heads
6613 a frequently executed basic block (usually the header of a loop).
6614
6615 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6616 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6617 define the macro.
6618
6619 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6620 to set the variable @code{align_loops} in the target's
6621 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6622 selection in @code{align_loops} in a @code{LOOP_ALIGN} implementation.
6623 @end defmac
6624
6625 @hook TARGET_ASM_LOOP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6626
6627 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6628 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6629 If @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER} / @code{LOOP_ALIGN} specify a different alignment,
6630 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6631
6632 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6633 to set the variable @code{align_labels} in the target's
6634 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6635 selection in @code{align_labels} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN} implementation.
6636 @end defmac
6637
6638 @hook TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6639
6640 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6641 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6642 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6643 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6644 expression of type @code{unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT}.
6645 @end defmac
6646
6647 @defmac ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6648 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6649 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6650 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6651 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6652 section.
6653 @end defmac
6654
6655 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6656 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6657 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6658 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6659 @end defmac
6660
6661 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN_WITH_NOP (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6662 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN}, except that the ``nop'' instruction is used
6663 for padding, if necessary.
6664 @end defmac
6665
6666 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
6667 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6668 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6669 @var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
6670 satisfy the alignment request. @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
6671 a C expression of type @code{int}.
6672 @end defmac
6673
6674 @need 3000
6675 @node Debugging Info
6676 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6677
6678 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6679 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6680
6681 @menu
6682 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6683 * DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6684 * DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6685 * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6686 * SDB and DWARF:: Macros for SDB (COFF) and DWARF formats.
6687 * VMS Debug:: Macros for VMS debug format.
6688 @end menu
6689
6690 @node All Debuggers
6691 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6692
6693 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6694 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6695
6696 @defmac DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6697 A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6698 register number @var{regno}. In the default macro provided, the value
6699 of this expression will be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are
6700 some registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6701 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in the
6702 compiler and another for DBX@.
6703
6704 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
6705 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6706 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6707 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6708 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6709
6710 If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6711 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6712 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6713 @end defmac
6714
6715 @defmac DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6716 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6717 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6718 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6719 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6720 that produce debugging output for DBX or COFF-style debugging output
6721 for SDB and allow the frame-pointer to be eliminated when the
6722 @option{-g} options is used.
6723 @end defmac
6724
6725 @defmac DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6726 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6727 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6728 @var{offset}.
6729 @end defmac
6730
6731 @defmac PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6732 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
6733 produce when the user specifies just @option{-g}. Define
6734 this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
6735 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
6736 @code{SDB_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF2_DEBUG},
6737 @code{XCOFF_DEBUG}, @code{VMS_DEBUG}, and @code{VMS_AND_DWARF2_DEBUG}.
6738
6739 When the user specifies @option{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
6740 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6741 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined, GCC uses the
6742 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6743 defined, GCC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
6744
6745 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6746 user can always get a specific type of output by using @option{-gstabs},
6747 @option{-gcoff}, @option{-gdwarf-2}, @option{-gxcoff}, or @option{-gvms}.
6748 @end defmac
6749
6750 @node DBX Options
6751 @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6752
6753 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6754 These are specific options for DBX output.
6755
6756 @defmac DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6757 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for DBX
6758 in response to the @option{-g} option.
6759 @end defmac
6760
6761 @defmac XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6762 Define this macro if GCC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6763 in response to the @option{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6764 @end defmac
6765
6766 @defmac DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6767 Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
6768 GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6769 debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6770 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6771 if there is any occasion to.
6772 @end defmac
6773
6774 @defmac DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6775 Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6776 in the text section.
6777 @end defmac
6778
6779 @defmac ASM_STABS_OP
6780 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6781 use instead of @code{"\t.stabs\t"} to define an ordinary debugging symbol.
6782 If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabs\t"} is used. This macro
6783 applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6784 @end defmac
6785
6786 @defmac ASM_STABD_OP
6787 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6788 use instead of @code{"\t.stabd\t"} to define a debugging symbol whose
6789 value is the current location. If you don't define this macro,
6790 @code{"\t.stabd\t"} is used. This macro applies only to DBX debugging
6791 information format.
6792 @end defmac
6793
6794 @defmac ASM_STABN_OP
6795 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6796 use instead of @code{"\t.stabn\t"} to define a debugging symbol with no
6797 name. If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabn\t"} is used. This
6798 macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6799 @end defmac
6800
6801 @defmac DBX_NO_XREFS
6802 Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6803 @samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6804 describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6805 On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6806 @end defmac
6807
6808 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6809 A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6810 continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6811 exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6812 operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6813 must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6814 with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6815 defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6816 @end defmac
6817
6818 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6819 Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6820 the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6821 a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6822 constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6823 if backslash is correct for your system.
6824 @end defmac
6825
6826 @defmac DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6827 Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6828 outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6829 variable.
6830 @end defmac
6831
6832 @defmac DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6833 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6834 for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6835 @end defmac
6836
6837 @defmac DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6838 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6839 for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6840 provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6841 @end defmac
6842
6843 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6844 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6845 for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6846 ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6847 @end defmac
6848
6849 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6850 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6851 passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6852 do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6853 @end defmac
6854
6855 @defmac DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6856 Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6857 arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6858 in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6859 code.
6860 @end defmac
6861
6862 @defmac DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6863 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol describing
6864 the scope of a block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be
6865 relative to the start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses
6866 an absolute address.
6867 @end defmac
6868
6869 @defmac DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6870 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol indicating
6871 the current line number (@code{N_SLINE}) should be relative to the
6872 start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses an absolute address.
6873 @end defmac
6874
6875 @defmac DBX_USE_BINCL
6876 Define this macro if GCC should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6877 @code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6878 macro also directs GCC to output a type number as a pair of a file
6879 number and a type number within the file. Normally, GCC does not
6880 generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6881 number for a type number.
6882 @end defmac
6883
6884 @node DBX Hooks
6885 @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6886
6887 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6888 These are hooks for DBX format.
6889
6890 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line}, @var{counter})
6891 A C statement to output DBX debugging information before code for line
6892 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
6893 @var{stream}. @var{counter} is the number of time the macro was
6894 invoked, including the current invocation; it is intended to generate
6895 unique labels in the assembly output.
6896
6897 This macro should not be defined if the default output is correct, or
6898 if it can be made correct by defining @code{DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE}.
6899 @end defmac
6900
6901 @defmac NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6902 Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
6903 @code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extension construct.
6904 On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
6905 disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6906 @end defmac
6907
6908 @defmac NO_DBX_BNSYM_ENSYM
6909 Some assemblers cannot handle the @code{.stabd BNSYM/ENSYM,0,0} gdb dbx
6910 extension construct. On those machines, define this macro to turn this
6911 feature off without disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6912 @end defmac
6913
6914 @node File Names and DBX
6915 @subsection File Names in DBX Format
6916
6917 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6918 This describes file names in DBX format.
6919
6920 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6921 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6922 @var{stream}, which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
6923 file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
6924 This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
6925
6926 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6927 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6928
6929 It may be necessary to refer to a label equal to the beginning of the
6930 text section. You can use @samp{assemble_name (stream, ltext_label_name)}
6931 to do so. If you do this, you must also set the variable
6932 @var{used_ltext_label_name} to @code{true}.
6933 @end defmac
6934
6935 @defmac NO_DBX_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
6936 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6937 of the current directory for compilation and current source language at
6938 the beginning of the file.
6939 @end defmac
6940
6941 @defmac NO_DBX_GCC_MARKER
6942 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6943 that this object file was compiled by GCC@. The default is to emit
6944 an @code{N_OPT} stab at the beginning of every source file, with
6945 @samp{gcc2_compiled.} for the string and value 0.
6946 @end defmac
6947
6948 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6949 A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
6950 compilation of the main source file @var{name}. Output should be
6951 written to the stdio stream @var{stream}.
6952
6953 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
6954 of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
6955 @end defmac
6956
6957 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_NULL_N_SO_AT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
6958 Define this macro @emph{instead of} defining
6959 @code{DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END}, if what needs to be output at
6960 the end of compilation is an @code{N_SO} stab with an empty string,
6961 whose value is the highest absolute text address in the file.
6962 @end defmac
6963
6964 @need 2000
6965 @node SDB and DWARF
6966 @subsection Macros for SDB and DWARF Output
6967
6968 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6969 Here are macros for SDB and DWARF output.
6970
6971 @defmac SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
6972 Define this macro if GCC should produce COFF-style debugging output
6973 for SDB in response to the @option{-g} option.
6974 @end defmac
6975
6976 @defmac DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6977 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
6978 debugging output in response to the @option{-g} option.
6979
6980 @hook TARGET_DWARF_CALLING_CONVENTION
6981
6982 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
6983 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
6984 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
6985 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
6986 as appropriate from @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
6987 @end defmac
6988
6989 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
6990 Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
6991 Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO}
6992 (@pxref{Exception Region Output}) returns @code{UI_DWARF2}, and
6993 exceptions are enabled, GCC will output this information not matter
6994 how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
6995 @end defmac
6996
6997 @hook TARGET_DEBUG_UNWIND_INFO
6998
6999 @defmac DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
7000 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
7001 line debug info sections. This will result in much more compact line number
7002 tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
7003 @end defmac
7004
7005 @hook TARGET_WANT_DEBUG_PUB_SECTIONS
7006
7007 @hook TARGET_FORCE_AT_COMP_DIR
7008
7009 @hook TARGET_DELAY_SCHED2
7010
7011 @hook TARGET_DELAY_VARTRACK
7012
7013 @hook TARGET_NO_REGISTER_ALLOCATION
7014
7015 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
7016 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
7017 @var{lab1} minus @var{lab2}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7018 @end defmac
7019
7020 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_VMS_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
7021 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
7022 between the two given labels in system defined units, e.g. instruction
7023 slots on IA64 VMS, using an integer of the given size.
7024 @end defmac
7025
7026 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_OFFSET (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label}, @var{section})
7027 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a
7028 section-relative reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the
7029 given @var{size}. The label is known to be defined in the given @var{section}.
7030 @end defmac
7031
7032 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_PCREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
7033 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a self-relative
7034 reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7035 @end defmac
7036
7037 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DATAREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
7038 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to the
7039 given @var{label} relative to the dbase, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7040 @end defmac
7041
7042 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_TABLE_REF (@var{label})
7043 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to
7044 the DWARF table identifier @var{label} from the current section. This
7045 is used on some systems to avoid garbage collecting a DWARF table which
7046 is referenced by a function.
7047 @end defmac
7048
7049 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL
7050
7051 @defmac PUT_SDB_@dots{}
7052 Define these macros to override the assembler syntax for the special
7053 SDB assembler directives. See @file{sdbout.c} for a list of these
7054 macros and their arguments. If the standard syntax is used, you need
7055 not define them yourself.
7056 @end defmac
7057
7058 @defmac SDB_DELIM
7059 Some assemblers do not support a semicolon as a delimiter, even between
7060 SDB assembler directives. In that case, define this macro to be the
7061 delimiter to use (usually @samp{\n}). It is not necessary to define
7062 a new set of @code{PUT_SDB_@var{op}} macros if this is the only change
7063 required.
7064 @end defmac
7065
7066 @defmac SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
7067 Define this macro to allow references to unknown structure,
7068 union, or enumeration tags to be emitted. Standard COFF does not
7069 allow handling of unknown references, MIPS ECOFF has support for
7070 it.
7071 @end defmac
7072
7073 @defmac SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
7074 Define this macro to allow references to structure, union, or
7075 enumeration tags that have not yet been seen to be handled. Some
7076 assemblers choke if forward tags are used, while some require it.
7077 @end defmac
7078
7079 @defmac SDB_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line})
7080 A C statement to output SDB debugging information before code for line
7081 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
7082 @var{stream}. The default is to emit an @code{.ln} directive.
7083 @end defmac
7084
7085 @need 2000
7086 @node VMS Debug
7087 @subsection Macros for VMS Debug Format
7088
7089 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7090 Here are macros for VMS debug format.
7091
7092 @defmac VMS_DEBUGGING_INFO
7093 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for VMS
7094 in response to the @option{-g} option. The default behavior for VMS
7095 is to generate minimal debug info for a traceback in the absence of
7096 @option{-g} unless explicitly overridden with @option{-g0}. This
7097 behavior is controlled by @code{TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION} and
7098 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}.
7099 @end defmac
7100
7101 @node Floating Point
7102 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
7103 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
7104 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
7105
7106 While all modern machines use twos-complement representation for integers,
7107 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
7108 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
7109 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
7110 doing the compilation.
7111
7112 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
7113 range and precision, all floating point constants must be represented in
7114 the target machine's format. Therefore, the cross compiler cannot
7115 safely use the host machine's floating point arithmetic; it must emulate
7116 the target's arithmetic. To ensure consistency, GCC always uses
7117 emulation to work with floating point values, even when the host and
7118 target floating point formats are identical.
7119
7120 The following macros are provided by @file{real.h} for the compiler to
7121 use. All parts of the compiler which generate or optimize
7122 floating-point calculations must use these macros. They may evaluate
7123 their operands more than once, so operands must not have side effects.
7124
7125 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7126 The C data type to be used to hold a floating point value in the target
7127 machine's format. Typically this is a @code{struct} containing an
7128 array of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, but all code should treat it as an opaque
7129 quantity.
7130 @end defmac
7131
7132 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{y})
7133 Compares for equality the two values, @var{x} and @var{y}. If the target
7134 floating point format supports negative zeroes and/or NaNs,
7135 @samp{REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (-0.0, 0.0)} is true, and
7136 @samp{REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (NaN, NaN)} is false.
7137 @end deftypefn
7138
7139 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUES_LESS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{y})
7140 Tests whether @var{x} is less than @var{y}.
7141 @end deftypefn
7142
7143 @deftypefn Macro HOST_WIDE_INT REAL_VALUE_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7144 Truncates @var{x} to a signed integer, rounding toward zero.
7145 @end deftypefn
7146
7147 @deftypefn Macro {unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT} REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7148 Truncates @var{x} to an unsigned integer, rounding toward zero. If
7149 @var{x} is negative, returns zero.
7150 @end deftypefn
7151
7152 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ATOF (const char *@var{string}, machine_mode @var{mode})
7153 Converts @var{string} into a floating point number in the target machine's
7154 representation for mode @var{mode}. This routine can handle both
7155 decimal and hexadecimal floating point constants, using the syntax
7156 defined by the C language for both.
7157 @end deftypefn
7158
7159 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7160 Returns 1 if @var{x} is negative (including negative zero), 0 otherwise.
7161 @end deftypefn
7162
7163 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISINF (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7164 Determines whether @var{x} represents infinity (positive or negative).
7165 @end deftypefn
7166
7167 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7168 Determines whether @var{x} represents a ``NaN'' (not-a-number).
7169 @end deftypefn
7170
7171 @deftypefn Macro void REAL_ARITHMETIC (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{output}, enum tree_code @var{code}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{y})
7172 Calculates an arithmetic operation on the two floating point values
7173 @var{x} and @var{y}, storing the result in @var{output} (which must be a
7174 variable).
7175
7176 The operation to be performed is specified by @var{code}. Only the
7177 following codes are supported: @code{PLUS_EXPR}, @code{MINUS_EXPR},
7178 @code{MULT_EXPR}, @code{RDIV_EXPR}, @code{MAX_EXPR}, @code{MIN_EXPR}.
7179
7180 If @code{REAL_ARITHMETIC} is asked to evaluate division by zero and the
7181 target's floating point format cannot represent infinity, it will call
7182 @code{abort}. Callers should check for this situation first, using
7183 @code{MODE_HAS_INFINITIES}. @xref{Storage Layout}.
7184 @end deftypefn
7185
7186 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7187 Returns the negative of the floating point value @var{x}.
7188 @end deftypefn
7189
7190 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ABS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7191 Returns the absolute value of @var{x}.
7192 @end deftypefn
7193
7194 @node Mode Switching
7195 @section Mode Switching Instructions
7196 @cindex mode switching
7197 The following macros control mode switching optimizations:
7198
7199 @defmac OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING (@var{entity})
7200 Define this macro if the port needs extra instructions inserted for mode
7201 switching in an optimizing compilation.
7202
7203 For an example, the SH4 can perform both single and double precision
7204 floating point operations, but to perform a single precision operation,
7205 the FPSCR PR bit has to be cleared, while for a double precision
7206 operation, this bit has to be set. Changing the PR bit requires a general
7207 purpose register as a scratch register, hence these FPSCR sets have to
7208 be inserted before reload, i.e.@: you can't put this into instruction emitting
7209 or @code{TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG}.
7210
7211 You can have multiple entities that are mode-switched, and select at run time
7212 which entities actually need it. @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} should
7213 return nonzero for any @var{entity} that needs mode-switching.
7214 If you define this macro, you also have to define
7215 @code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING}, @code{TARGET_MODE_NEEDED},
7216 @code{TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY} and @code{TARGET_MODE_EMIT}.
7217 @code{TARGET_MODE_AFTER}, @code{TARGET_MODE_ENTRY}, and @code{TARGET_MODE_EXIT}
7218 are optional.
7219 @end defmac
7220
7221 @defmac NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
7222 If you define @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING}, you have to define this as
7223 initializer for an array of integers. Each initializer element
7224 N refers to an entity that needs mode switching, and specifies the number
7225 of different modes that might need to be set for this entity.
7226 The position of the initializer in the initializer---starting counting at
7227 zero---determines the integer that is used to refer to the mode-switched
7228 entity in question.
7229 In macros that take mode arguments / yield a mode result, modes are
7230 represented as numbers 0 @dots{} N @minus{} 1. N is used to specify that no mode
7231 switch is needed / supplied.
7232 @end defmac
7233
7234 @hook TARGET_MODE_EMIT
7235
7236 @hook TARGET_MODE_NEEDED
7237
7238 @hook TARGET_MODE_AFTER
7239
7240 @hook TARGET_MODE_ENTRY
7241
7242 @hook TARGET_MODE_EXIT
7243
7244 @hook TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY
7245
7246 @node Target Attributes
7247 @section Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}
7248 @cindex target attributes
7249 @cindex machine attributes
7250 @cindex attributes, target-specific
7251
7252 Target-specific attributes may be defined for functions, data and types.
7253 These are described using the following target hooks; they also need to
7254 be documented in @file{extend.texi}.
7255
7256 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE
7257
7258 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TAKES_IDENTIFIER_P
7259
7260 @hook TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7261
7262 @hook TARGET_SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7263
7264 @hook TARGET_MERGE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7265
7266 @hook TARGET_MERGE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7267
7268 @hook TARGET_VALID_DLLIMPORT_ATTRIBUTE_P
7269
7270 @defmac TARGET_DECLSPEC
7271 Define this macro to a nonzero value if you want to treat
7272 @code{__declspec(X)} as equivalent to @code{__attribute((X))}. By
7273 default, this behavior is enabled only for targets that define
7274 @code{TARGET_DLLIMPORT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES}. The current implementation
7275 of @code{__declspec} is via a built-in macro, but you should not rely
7276 on this implementation detail.
7277 @end defmac
7278
7279 @hook TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7280
7281 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ATTRIBUTE_INLINABLE_P
7282
7283 @hook TARGET_OPTION_VALID_ATTRIBUTE_P
7284
7285 @hook TARGET_OPTION_SAVE
7286
7287 @hook TARGET_OPTION_RESTORE
7288
7289 @hook TARGET_OPTION_POST_STREAM_IN
7290
7291 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRINT
7292
7293 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRAGMA_PARSE
7294
7295 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE
7296
7297 @hook TARGET_OPTION_FUNCTION_VERSIONS
7298
7299 @hook TARGET_CAN_INLINE_P
7300
7301 @node Emulated TLS
7302 @section Emulating TLS
7303 @cindex Emulated TLS
7304
7305 For targets whose psABI does not provide Thread Local Storage via
7306 specific relocations and instruction sequences, an emulation layer is
7307 used. A set of target hooks allows this emulation layer to be
7308 configured for the requirements of a particular target. For instance
7309 the psABI may in fact specify TLS support in terms of an emulation
7310 layer.
7311
7312 The emulation layer works by creating a control object for every TLS
7313 object. To access the TLS object, a lookup function is provided
7314 which, when given the address of the control object, will return the
7315 address of the current thread's instance of the TLS object.
7316
7317 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_GET_ADDRESS
7318
7319 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_REGISTER_COMMON
7320
7321 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_SECTION
7322
7323 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_SECTION
7324
7325 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_PREFIX
7326
7327 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_PREFIX
7328
7329 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_FIELDS
7330
7331 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_INIT
7332
7333 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_ALIGN_FIXED
7334
7335 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_DEBUG_FORM_TLS_ADDRESS
7336
7337 @node MIPS Coprocessors
7338 @section Defining coprocessor specifics for MIPS targets.
7339 @cindex MIPS coprocessor-definition macros
7340
7341 The MIPS specification allows MIPS implementations to have as many as 4
7342 coprocessors, each with as many as 32 private registers. GCC supports
7343 accessing these registers and transferring values between the registers
7344 and memory using asm-ized variables. For example:
7345
7346 @smallexample
7347 register unsigned int cp0count asm ("c0r1");
7348 unsigned int d;
7349
7350 d = cp0count + 3;
7351 @end smallexample
7352
7353 (``c0r1'' is the default name of register 1 in coprocessor 0; alternate
7354 names may be added as described below, or the default names may be
7355 overridden entirely in @code{SUBTARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}.)
7356
7357 Coprocessor registers are assumed to be epilogue-used; sets to them will
7358 be preserved even if it does not appear that the register is used again
7359 later in the function.
7360
7361 Another note: according to the MIPS spec, coprocessor 1 (if present) is
7362 the FPU@. One accesses COP1 registers through standard mips
7363 floating-point support; they are not included in this mechanism.
7364
7365 @node PCH Target
7366 @section Parameters for Precompiled Header Validity Checking
7367 @cindex parameters, precompiled headers
7368
7369 @hook TARGET_GET_PCH_VALIDITY
7370
7371 @hook TARGET_PCH_VALID_P
7372
7373 @hook TARGET_CHECK_PCH_TARGET_FLAGS
7374
7375 @hook TARGET_PREPARE_PCH_SAVE
7376
7377 @node C++ ABI
7378 @section C++ ABI parameters
7379 @cindex parameters, c++ abi
7380
7381 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_TYPE
7382
7383 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_MASK_BIT
7384
7385 @hook TARGET_CXX_GET_COOKIE_SIZE
7386
7387 @hook TARGET_CXX_COOKIE_HAS_SIZE
7388
7389 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPORT_EXPORT_CLASS
7390
7391 @hook TARGET_CXX_CDTOR_RETURNS_THIS
7392
7393 @hook TARGET_CXX_KEY_METHOD_MAY_BE_INLINE
7394
7395 @hook TARGET_CXX_DETERMINE_CLASS_DATA_VISIBILITY
7396
7397 @hook TARGET_CXX_CLASS_DATA_ALWAYS_COMDAT
7398
7399 @hook TARGET_CXX_LIBRARY_RTTI_COMDAT
7400
7401 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_AEABI_ATEXIT
7402
7403 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_ATEXIT_FOR_CXA_ATEXIT
7404
7405 @hook TARGET_CXX_ADJUST_CLASS_AT_DEFINITION
7406
7407 @hook TARGET_CXX_DECL_MANGLING_CONTEXT
7408
7409 @node Named Address Spaces
7410 @section Adding support for named address spaces
7411 @cindex named address spaces
7412
7413 The draft technical report of the ISO/IEC JTC1 S22 WG14 N1275
7414 standards committee, @cite{Programming Languages - C - Extensions to
7415 support embedded processors}, specifies a syntax for embedded
7416 processors to specify alternate address spaces. You can configure a
7417 GCC port to support section 5.1 of the draft report to add support for
7418 address spaces other than the default address space. These address
7419 spaces are new keywords that are similar to the @code{volatile} and
7420 @code{const} type attributes.
7421
7422 Pointers to named address spaces can have a different size than
7423 pointers to the generic address space.
7424
7425 For example, the SPU port uses the @code{__ea} address space to refer
7426 to memory in the host processor, rather than memory local to the SPU
7427 processor. Access to memory in the @code{__ea} address space involves
7428 issuing DMA operations to move data between the host processor and the
7429 local processor memory address space. Pointers in the @code{__ea}
7430 address space are either 32 bits or 64 bits based on the
7431 @option{-mea32} or @option{-mea64} switches (native SPU pointers are
7432 always 32 bits).
7433
7434 Internally, address spaces are represented as a small integer in the
7435 range 0 to 15 with address space 0 being reserved for the generic
7436 address space.
7437
7438 To register a named address space qualifier keyword with the C front end,
7439 the target may call the @code{c_register_addr_space} routine. For example,
7440 the SPU port uses the following to declare @code{__ea} as the keyword for
7441 named address space #1:
7442 @smallexample
7443 #define ADDR_SPACE_EA 1
7444 c_register_addr_space ("__ea", ADDR_SPACE_EA);
7445 @end smallexample
7446
7447 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_POINTER_MODE
7448
7449 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ADDRESS_MODE
7450
7451 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_VALID_POINTER_MODE
7452
7453 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
7454
7455 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
7456
7457 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_SUBSET_P
7458
7459 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_CONVERT
7460
7461 @node Misc
7462 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
7463 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7464
7465 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7466 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7467
7468 @defmac HAS_LONG_COND_BRANCH
7469 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7470 has conditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7471 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7472 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7473 set to false, gcc will convert any conditional branches that attempt
7474 to cross between sections into unconditional branches or indirect jumps.
7475 @end defmac
7476
7477 @defmac HAS_LONG_UNCOND_BRANCH
7478 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7479 has unconditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7480 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7481 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7482 set to false, gcc will convert any unconditional branches that attempt
7483 to cross between sections into indirect jumps.
7484 @end defmac
7485
7486 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7487 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7488 elements of a jump-table should have.
7489 @end defmac
7490
7491 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7492 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7493 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7494 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7495 To make this work, you also have to define @code{INSN_ALIGN} and
7496 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
7497 The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
7498 flags can be updated.
7499 @end defmac
7500
7501 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7502 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7503 should contain relative addresses. You need not define this macro if
7504 jump-tables never contain relative addresses, or jump-tables should
7505 contain relative addresses only when @option{-fPIC} or @option{-fPIC}
7506 is in effect.
7507 @end defmac
7508
7509 @hook TARGET_CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7510
7511 @defmac WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7512 Define this macro to 1 if operations between registers with integral mode
7513 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
7514 Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7515 @end defmac
7516
7517 @defmac LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mem_mode})
7518 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7519 memory in @var{mem_mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7520 bits outside of @var{mem_mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7521 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7522 of @var{mem_mode} for which the
7523 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7524 @code{UNKNOWN} for other modes.
7525
7526 This macro is not called with @var{mem_mode} non-integral or with a width
7527 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7528 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7529 @code{UNKNOWN}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7530 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7531
7532 You may return a non-@code{UNKNOWN} value even if for some hard registers
7533 the sign extension is not performed, if for the @code{REGNO_REG_CLASS}
7534 of these hard registers @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} returns nonzero
7535 when the @var{from} mode is @var{mem_mode} and the @var{to} mode is any
7536 integral mode larger than this but not larger than @code{word_mode}.
7537
7538 You must return @code{UNKNOWN} if for some hard registers that allow this
7539 mode, @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} says that they cannot change to
7540 @code{word_mode}, but that they can change to another integral mode that
7541 is larger then @var{mem_mode} but still smaller than @code{word_mode}.
7542 @end defmac
7543
7544 @defmac SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7545 Define this macro to 1 if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7546 extends.
7547 @end defmac
7548
7549 @hook TARGET_MIN_DIVISIONS_FOR_RECIP_MUL
7550
7551 @defmac MOVE_MAX
7552 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7553 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7554 @end defmac
7555
7556 @defmac MAX_MOVE_MAX
7557 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7558 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7559 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7560 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7561 at run-time.
7562 @end defmac
7563
7564 @defmac SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7565 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7566 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7567 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7568 this macro is nonzero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7569 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7570 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7571 instructions that act on bit-fields at variable positions, which may
7572 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7573 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7574 arguments to bit-field instructions.
7575
7576 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7577 position (for bit-field operations), or if no variable-position bit-field
7578 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7579
7580 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7581 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7582 bit-field operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7583 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7584 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7585
7586 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7587 @end defmac
7588
7589 @anchor{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}
7590 @hook TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK
7591
7592 @defmac TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (@var{outprec}, @var{inprec})
7593 A C expression which is nonzero if on this machine it is safe to
7594 ``convert'' an integer of @var{inprec} bits to one of @var{outprec}
7595 bits (where @var{outprec} is smaller than @var{inprec}) by merely
7596 operating on it as if it had only @var{outprec} bits.
7597
7598 On many machines, this expression can be 1.
7599
7600 @c rearranged this, removed the phrase "it is reported that". this was
7601 @c to fix an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
7602 When @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} returns 1 for a pair of sizes for
7603 modes for which @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P} is 0, suboptimal code can result.
7604 If this is the case, making @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} return 0 in
7605 such cases may improve things.
7606 @end defmac
7607
7608 @hook TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED
7609
7610 @defmac STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7611 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7612 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7613 (@samp{cstore@var{mode}4}) when the condition is true. This description must
7614 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} patterns and all the
7615 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7616
7617 A value of 1 or @minus{}1 means that the instruction implementing the
7618 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or @minus{}1 when the comparison is true
7619 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7620 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7621 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7622 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7623 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7624 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7625 the compiler.
7626
7627 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or @minus{}1, the compiler will
7628 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7629 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7630 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7631 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7632 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7633 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7634 expression
7635
7636 @smallexample
7637 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7638 @end smallexample
7639
7640 @noindent
7641 can be converted to
7642
7643 @smallexample
7644 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7645 @end smallexample
7646
7647 @noindent
7648 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7649 tested into the sign bit.
7650
7651 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7652 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7653 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7654 are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7655 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7656 comparison operators and let us know at @email{gcc@@gcc.gnu.org}.
7657
7658 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7659 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7660 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7661 to be used:
7662
7663 @itemize @bullet
7664 @item
7665 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7666 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7667 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7668 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7669 combine the normalization with other operations.
7670
7671 @item
7672 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or @minus{}1, with @minus{}1 being
7673 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7674 other machines.
7675
7676 @item
7677 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7678 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7679 others.
7680
7681 @item
7682 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7683 @end itemize
7684
7685 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7686 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7687 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7688 those cases, e.g., one matching
7689
7690 @smallexample
7691 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7692 @end smallexample
7693
7694 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7695 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7696 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7697 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7698 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7699 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7700 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptimizer can be used to
7701 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7702
7703 If this macro is not defined, the default value, 1, is used. You need
7704 not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7705 instructions, or if the value generated by these instructions is 1.
7706 @end defmac
7707
7708 @defmac FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7709 A C expression that gives a nonzero @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} value that is
7710 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7711 Define this macro on machines that have comparison operations that return
7712 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7713 this macro.
7714 @end defmac
7715
7716 @defmac VECTOR_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7717 A C expression that gives a rtx representing the nonzero true element
7718 for vector comparisons. The returned rtx should be valid for the inner
7719 mode of @var{mode} which is guaranteed to be a vector mode. Define
7720 this macro on machines that have vector comparison operations that
7721 return a vector result. If there are no such operations, do not define
7722 this macro. Typically, this macro is defined as @code{const1_rtx} or
7723 @code{constm1_rtx}. This macro may return @code{NULL_RTX} to prevent
7724 the compiler optimizing such vector comparison operations for the
7725 given mode.
7726 @end defmac
7727
7728 @defmac CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7729 @defmacx CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7730 A C expression that indicates whether the architecture defines a value
7731 for @code{clz} or @code{ctz} with a zero operand.
7732 A result of @code{0} indicates the value is undefined.
7733 If the value is defined for only the RTL expression, the macro should
7734 evaluate to @code{1}; if the value applies also to the corresponding optab
7735 entry (which is normally the case if it expands directly into
7736 the corresponding RTL), then the macro should evaluate to @code{2}.
7737 In the cases where the value is defined, @var{value} should be set to
7738 this value.
7739
7740 If this macro is not defined, the value of @code{clz} or
7741 @code{ctz} at zero is assumed to be undefined.
7742
7743 This macro must be defined if the target's expansion for @code{ffs}
7744 relies on a particular value to get correct results. Otherwise it
7745 is not necessary, though it may be used to optimize some corner cases, and
7746 to provide a default expansion for the @code{ffs} optab.
7747
7748 Note that regardless of this macro the ``definedness'' of @code{clz}
7749 and @code{ctz} at zero do @emph{not} extend to the builtin functions
7750 visible to the user. Thus one may be free to adjust the value at will
7751 to match the target expansion of these operations without fear of
7752 breaking the API@.
7753 @end defmac
7754
7755 @defmac Pmode
7756 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7757 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7758 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7759 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7760 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7761
7762 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7763 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7764 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7765 to @code{Pmode}.
7766 @end defmac
7767
7768 @defmac FUNCTION_MODE
7769 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7770 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most CISC machines,
7771 where an instruction can begin at any byte address, this should be
7772 @code{QImode}. On most RISC machines, where all instructions have fixed
7773 size and alignment, this should be a mode with the same size and alignment
7774 as the machine instruction words - typically @code{SImode} or @code{HImode}.
7775 @end defmac
7776
7777 @defmac STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS
7778 In normal operation, the preprocessor expands @code{__STDC__} to the
7779 constant 1, to signify that GCC conforms to ISO Standard C@. On some
7780 hosts, like Solaris, the system compiler uses a different convention,
7781 where @code{__STDC__} is normally 0, but is 1 if the user specifies
7782 strict conformance to the C Standard.
7783
7784 Defining @code{STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS} makes GNU CPP follows the host
7785 convention when processing system header files, but when processing user
7786 files @code{__STDC__} will always expand to 1.
7787 @end defmac
7788
7789 @hook TARGET_C_PREINCLUDE
7790
7791 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7792
7793 @defmac NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7794 Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C@.
7795 This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
7796 C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
7797 @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7798 @end defmac
7799
7800 @findex #pragma
7801 @findex pragma
7802 @defmac REGISTER_TARGET_PRAGMAS ()
7803 Define this macro if you want to implement any target-specific pragmas.
7804 If defined, it is a C expression which makes a series of calls to
7805 @code{c_register_pragma} or @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion}
7806 for each pragma. The macro may also do any
7807 setup required for the pragmas.
7808
7809 The primary reason to define this macro is to provide compatibility with
7810 other compilers for the same target. In general, we discourage
7811 definition of target-specific pragmas for GCC@.
7812
7813 If the pragma can be implemented by attributes then you should consider
7814 defining the target hook @samp{TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} as well.
7815
7816 Preprocessor macros that appear on pragma lines are not expanded. All
7817 @samp{#pragma} directives that do not match any registered pragma are
7818 silently ignored, unless the user specifies @option{-Wunknown-pragmas}.
7819 @end defmac
7820
7821 @deftypefun void c_register_pragma (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7822 @deftypefunx void c_register_pragma_with_expansion (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7823
7824 Each call to @code{c_register_pragma} or
7825 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} establishes one pragma. The
7826 @var{callback} routine will be called when the preprocessor encounters a
7827 pragma of the form
7828
7829 @smallexample
7830 #pragma [@var{space}] @var{name} @dots{}
7831 @end smallexample
7832
7833 @var{space} is the case-sensitive namespace of the pragma, or
7834 @code{NULL} to put the pragma in the global namespace. The callback
7835 routine receives @var{pfile} as its first argument, which can be passed
7836 on to cpplib's functions if necessary. You can lex tokens after the
7837 @var{name} by calling @code{pragma_lex}. Tokens that are not read by the
7838 callback will be silently ignored. The end of the line is indicated by
7839 a token of type @code{CPP_EOF}. Macro expansion occurs on the
7840 arguments of pragmas registered with
7841 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} but not on the arguments of
7842 pragmas registered with @code{c_register_pragma}.
7843
7844 Note that the use of @code{pragma_lex} is specific to the C and C++
7845 compilers. It will not work in the Java or Fortran compilers, or any
7846 other language compilers for that matter. Thus if @code{pragma_lex} is going
7847 to be called from target-specific code, it must only be done so when
7848 building the C and C++ compilers. This can be done by defining the
7849 variables @code{c_target_objs} and @code{cxx_target_objs} in the
7850 target entry in the @file{config.gcc} file. These variables should name
7851 the target-specific, language-specific object file which contains the
7852 code that uses @code{pragma_lex}. Note it will also be necessary to add a
7853 rule to the makefile fragment pointed to by @code{tmake_file} that shows
7854 how to build this object file.
7855 @end deftypefun
7856
7857 @defmac HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_WITH_EXPANSION
7858 Define this macro if macros should be expanded in the
7859 arguments of @samp{#pragma pack}.
7860 @end defmac
7861
7862 @defmac TARGET_DEFAULT_PACK_STRUCT
7863 If your target requires a structure packing default other than 0 (meaning
7864 the machine default), define this macro to the necessary value (in bytes).
7865 This must be a value that would also be valid to use with
7866 @samp{#pragma pack()} (that is, a small power of two).
7867 @end defmac
7868
7869 @defmac DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7870 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in
7871 identifier names for the C family of languages. 0 means @samp{$} is
7872 not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed. 1 is the default;
7873 there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7874 @end defmac
7875
7876 @defmac INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7877 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7878 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7879 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7880 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
7881 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7882 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7883 you should define this macro.
7884
7885 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7886 @end defmac
7887
7888 @defmac INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7889 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7890 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7891 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7892 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7893 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7894 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7895 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7896 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7897 slot of @var{insn}.
7898
7899 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7900 @end defmac
7901
7902 @defmac MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7903 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if, in some cases,
7904 global symbols from one translation unit may not be bound to undefined
7905 symbols in another translation unit without user intervention. For
7906 instance, under Microsoft Windows symbols must be explicitly imported
7907 from shared libraries (DLLs).
7908
7909 You need not define this macro if it would always evaluate to zero.
7910 @end defmac
7911
7912 @hook TARGET_MD_ASM_ADJUST
7913
7914 @defmac MATH_LIBRARY
7915 Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
7916 in the system math library, minus the initial @samp{"-l"}, or
7917 @samp{""} if the target does not have a
7918 separate math library.
7919
7920 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"m"} is wrong.
7921 @end defmac
7922
7923 @defmac LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
7924 Define this macro as a C string constant for the environment variable that
7925 specifies where the linker should look for libraries.
7926
7927 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"LIBRARY_PATH"}
7928 is wrong.
7929 @end defmac
7930
7931 @defmac TARGET_POSIX_IO
7932 Define this macro if the target supports the following POSIX@ file
7933 functions, access, mkdir and file locking with fcntl / F_SETLKW@.
7934 Defining @code{TARGET_POSIX_IO} will enable the test coverage code
7935 to use file locking when exiting a program, which avoids race conditions
7936 if the program has forked. It will also create directories at run-time
7937 for cross-profiling.
7938 @end defmac
7939
7940 @defmac MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
7941
7942 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions to execute via
7943 conditional execution instructions instead of a branch. A value of
7944 @code{BRANCH_COST}+1 is the default if the machine does not use cc0, and
7945 1 if it does use cc0.
7946 @end defmac
7947
7948 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7949 Used if the target needs to perform machine-dependent modifications on the
7950 conditionals used for turning basic blocks into conditionally executed code.
7951 @var{ce_info} points to a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which
7952 contains information about the currently processed blocks. @var{true_expr}
7953 and @var{false_expr} are the tests that are used for converting the
7954 then-block and the else-block, respectively. Set either @var{true_expr} or
7955 @var{false_expr} to a null pointer if the tests cannot be converted.
7956 @end defmac
7957
7958 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_MULTIPLE_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{bb}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7959 Like @code{IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS}, but used when converting more complicated
7960 if-statements into conditions combined by @code{and} and @code{or} operations.
7961 @var{bb} contains the basic block that contains the test that is currently
7962 being processed and about to be turned into a condition.
7963 @end defmac
7964
7965 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_INSN (@var{ce_info}, @var{pattern}, @var{insn})
7966 A C expression to modify the @var{PATTERN} of an @var{INSN} that is to
7967 be converted to conditional execution format. @var{ce_info} points to
7968 a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which contains information
7969 about the currently processed blocks.
7970 @end defmac
7971
7972 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_FINAL (@var{ce_info})
7973 A C expression to perform any final machine dependent modifications in
7974 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7975 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7976 to by @var{ce_info}.
7977 @end defmac
7978
7979 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_CANCEL (@var{ce_info})
7980 A C expression to cancel any machine dependent modifications in
7981 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7982 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7983 to by @var{ce_info}.
7984 @end defmac
7985
7986 @defmac IFCVT_MACHDEP_INIT (@var{ce_info})
7987 A C expression to initialize any machine specific data for if-conversion
7988 of the if-block in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7989 to by @var{ce_info}.
7990 @end defmac
7991
7992 @hook TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
7993
7994 @hook TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS
7995
7996 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_DECL
7997
7998 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN
7999
8000 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_CHKP_FUNCTION
8001 @hook TARGET_CHKP_BOUND_TYPE
8002 @hook TARGET_CHKP_BOUND_MODE
8003 @hook TARGET_CHKP_MAKE_BOUNDS_CONSTANT
8004 @hook TARGET_CHKP_INITIALIZE_BOUNDS
8005
8006 @hook TARGET_RESOLVE_OVERLOADED_BUILTIN
8007
8008 @hook TARGET_FOLD_BUILTIN
8009
8010 @hook TARGET_GIMPLE_FOLD_BUILTIN
8011
8012 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_VERSION_PRIORITY
8013
8014 @hook TARGET_GET_FUNCTION_VERSIONS_DISPATCHER
8015
8016 @hook TARGET_GENERATE_VERSION_DISPATCHER_BODY
8017
8018 @hook TARGET_CAN_USE_DOLOOP_P
8019
8020 @hook TARGET_INVALID_WITHIN_DOLOOP
8021
8022 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_COMBINED_INSN
8023
8024 @hook TARGET_CAN_FOLLOW_JUMP
8025
8026 @hook TARGET_COMMUTATIVE_P
8027
8028 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_INITIAL_VALUE
8029
8030 @hook TARGET_UNSPEC_MAY_TRAP_P
8031
8032 @hook TARGET_SET_CURRENT_FUNCTION
8033
8034 @defmac TARGET_OBJECT_SUFFIX
8035 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix for object
8036 files on your target machine. If you do not define this macro, GCC will
8037 use @samp{.o} as the suffix for object files.
8038 @end defmac
8039
8040 @defmac TARGET_EXECUTABLE_SUFFIX
8041 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix to be
8042 automatically added to executable files on your target machine. If you
8043 do not define this macro, GCC will use the null string as the suffix for
8044 executable files.
8045 @end defmac
8046
8047 @defmac COLLECT_EXPORT_LIST
8048 If defined, @code{collect2} will scan the individual object files
8049 specified on its command line and create an export list for the linker.
8050 Define this macro for systems like AIX, where the linker discards
8051 object files that are not referenced from @code{main} and uses export
8052 lists.
8053 @end defmac
8054
8055 @defmac MODIFY_JNI_METHOD_CALL (@var{mdecl})
8056 Define this macro to a C expression representing a variant of the
8057 method call @var{mdecl}, if Java Native Interface (JNI) methods
8058 must be invoked differently from other methods on your target.
8059 For example, on 32-bit Microsoft Windows, JNI methods must be invoked using
8060 the @code{stdcall} calling convention and this macro is then
8061 defined as this expression:
8062
8063 @smallexample
8064 build_type_attribute_variant (@var{mdecl},
8065 build_tree_list
8066 (get_identifier ("stdcall"),
8067 NULL))
8068 @end smallexample
8069 @end defmac
8070
8071 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_MODIFY_JUMPS_P
8072
8073 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CLASS
8074
8075 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CALLEE_SAVED
8076
8077 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTION
8078
8079 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_FIRST
8080
8081 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_NEXT
8082
8083 @hook TARGET_LOOP_UNROLL_ADJUST
8084
8085 @defmac POWI_MAX_MULTS
8086 If defined, this macro is interpreted as a signed integer C expression
8087 that specifies the maximum number of floating point multiplications
8088 that should be emitted when expanding exponentiation by an integer
8089 constant inline. When this value is defined, exponentiation requiring
8090 more than this number of multiplications is implemented by calling the
8091 system library's @code{pow}, @code{powf} or @code{powl} routines.
8092 The default value places no upper bound on the multiplication count.
8093 @end defmac
8094
8095 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
8096 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
8097 target. The parameter @var{stdinc} indicates if normal include files
8098 are present. The parameter @var{sysroot} is the system root directory.
8099 The parameter @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8100 @end deftypefn
8101
8102 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_PRE_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
8103 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
8104 target before any standard headers. The parameter @var{stdinc}
8105 indicates if normal include files are present. The parameter
8106 @var{sysroot} is the system root directory. The parameter
8107 @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8108 @end deftypefn
8109
8110 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_OPTF (char *@var{path})
8111 This target hook should register special include paths for the target.
8112 The parameter @var{path} is the include to register. On Darwin
8113 systems, this is used for Framework includes, which have semantics
8114 that are different from @option{-I}.
8115 @end deftypefn
8116
8117 @defmac bool TARGET_USE_LOCAL_THUNK_ALIAS_P (tree @var{fndecl})
8118 This target macro returns @code{true} if it is safe to use a local alias
8119 for a virtual function @var{fndecl} when constructing thunks,
8120 @code{false} otherwise. By default, the macro returns @code{true} for all
8121 functions, if a target supports aliases (i.e.@: defines
8122 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF}), @code{false} otherwise,
8123 @end defmac
8124
8125 @defmac TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES
8126 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8127 target-specific format checking information for the @option{-Wformat}
8128 option. The default is to have no target-specific format checks.
8129 @end defmac
8130
8131 @defmac TARGET_N_FORMAT_TYPES
8132 If defined, this macro is the number of entries in
8133 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES}.
8134 @end defmac
8135
8136 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES
8137 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8138 target-specific format overrides for the @option{-Wformat} option. The
8139 default is to have no target-specific format overrides. If defined,
8140 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES} must be defined, too.
8141 @end defmac
8142
8143 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES_COUNT
8144 If defined, this macro specifies the number of entries in
8145 @code{TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES}.
8146 @end defmac
8147
8148 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_INIT
8149 If defined, this macro specifies the optional initialization
8150 routine for target specific customizations of the system printf
8151 and scanf formatter settings.
8152 @end defmac
8153
8154 @hook TARGET_INVALID_ARG_FOR_UNPROTOTYPED_FN
8155
8156 @hook TARGET_INVALID_CONVERSION
8157
8158 @hook TARGET_INVALID_UNARY_OP
8159
8160 @hook TARGET_INVALID_BINARY_OP
8161
8162 @hook TARGET_INVALID_PARAMETER_TYPE
8163
8164 @hook TARGET_INVALID_RETURN_TYPE
8165
8166 @hook TARGET_PROMOTED_TYPE
8167
8168 @hook TARGET_CONVERT_TO_TYPE
8169
8170 @defmac TARGET_USE_JCR_SECTION
8171 This macro determines whether to use the JCR section to register Java
8172 classes. By default, TARGET_USE_JCR_SECTION is defined to 1 if both
8173 SUPPORTS_WEAK and TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS are true, else 0.
8174 @end defmac
8175
8176 @defmac OBJC_JBLEN
8177 This macro determines the size of the objective C jump buffer for the
8178 NeXT runtime. By default, OBJC_JBLEN is defined to an innocuous value.
8179 @end defmac
8180
8181 @defmac LIBGCC2_UNWIND_ATTRIBUTE
8182 Define this macro if any target-specific attributes need to be attached
8183 to the functions in @file{libgcc} that provide low-level support for
8184 call stack unwinding. It is used in declarations in @file{unwind-generic.h}
8185 and the associated definitions of those functions.
8186 @end defmac
8187
8188 @hook TARGET_UPDATE_STACK_BOUNDARY
8189
8190 @hook TARGET_GET_DRAP_RTX
8191
8192 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_STACK_SLOTS_FOR_ARGS
8193
8194 @hook TARGET_CONST_ANCHOR
8195
8196 @hook TARGET_ASAN_SHADOW_OFFSET
8197
8198 @hook TARGET_MEMMODEL_CHECK
8199
8200 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_TEST_AND_SET_TRUEVAL
8201
8202 @hook TARGET_HAS_IFUNC_P
8203
8204 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ALIGN_FOR_MODE
8205
8206 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ASSIGN_EXPAND_FENV
8207
8208 @hook TARGET_RECORD_OFFLOAD_SYMBOL
8209
8210 @hook TARGET_OFFLOAD_OPTIONS
8211
8212 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT
8213
8214 On older ports, large integers are stored in @code{CONST_DOUBLE} rtl
8215 objects. Newer ports define @code{TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT} to be nonzero
8216 to indicate that large integers are stored in
8217 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} rtl objects. The @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} allows
8218 very large integer constants to be represented. @code{CONST_DOUBLE}
8219 is limited to twice the size of the host's @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}
8220 representation.
8221
8222 Converting a port mostly requires looking for the places where
8223 @code{CONST_DOUBLE}s are used with @code{VOIDmode} and replacing that
8224 code with code that accesses @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. @samp{"grep -i
8225 const_double"} at the port level gets you to 95% of the changes that
8226 need to be made. There are a few places that require a deeper look.
8227
8228 @itemize @bullet
8229 @item
8230 There is no equivalent to @code{hval} and @code{lval} for
8231 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. This would be difficult to express in the md
8232 language since there are a variable number of elements.
8233
8234 Most ports only check that @code{hval} is either 0 or -1 to see if the
8235 value is small. As mentioned above, this will no longer be necessary
8236 since small constants are always @code{CONST_INT}. Of course there
8237 are still a few exceptions, the alpha's constraint used by the zap
8238 instruction certainly requires careful examination by C code.
8239 However, all the current code does is pass the hval and lval to C
8240 code, so evolving the c code to look at the @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} is
8241 not really a large change.
8242
8243 @item
8244 Because there is no standard template that ports use to materialize
8245 constants, there is likely to be some futzing that is unique to each
8246 port in this code.
8247
8248 @item
8249 The rtx costs may have to be adjusted to properly account for larger
8250 constants that are represented as @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}.
8251 @end itemize
8252
8253 All and all it does not take long to convert ports that the
8254 maintainer is familiar with.
8255
8256 @end defmac